SLR Digital Camera
Operating Manual
For optimum camera performance, please read the
Operating Manual before using the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
To users of this camera
•
Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields
produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage
the stored data, or affect the product’s internal circuitry and cause camera misoperation.
• The liquid crystal panel used in the monitor is manufactured using extremely high
precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you
should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate
when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in this
manual are different from the actual ones.
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a
Macintosh hereafter.
• In this manual, the term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of batteries used for this
camera and its accessories.
For Using Your Camera Safely
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using this product,
we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following symbols.
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause
serious personal injuries.
Warning
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor
Caution
or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.
About the Camera
Warning
• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present
inside the camera, with the risk of electric shock.
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the
camera, never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.
• Wrapping the strap around your neck is dangerous. Take care that small
children do not hang the strap around their necks.
• Do not look directly at the sun through the camera with a telephoto lens
attached, as viewing the sun may damage your eyes. Viewing the sun
directly with a telephoto lens may lead to a loss of eyesight.
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop
use immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your
nearest PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause
a fire or electric shock.
• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may
burn yourself.
• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration
may occur.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low
temperature burns when holding such portions for long periods.
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be
careful not to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or
mouth.
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the
camera may cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality,
stop using the camera and get medical attention immediately.
About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter
Warning
•
Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this
product, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC
adapter not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery charger
or AC adapter with an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric
shock, or camera breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical
shock.
•
If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality
occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service
Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric shock.
• If thunderstorm should be present during use of the battery charger and AC
plug cord, unplug the power plug and discontinue use. Continuing to use the
product can cause damage to the equipment, fire or electrical shock.
• Wipe off the power plug if it should become covered with dust. Accumulated
dust may cause a fire.
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL certified power supply cord
set, cord is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end
with a molded-on male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA
configuration), and the other is provided with a molded-on female connector
body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial type configuration) or the equivalent.
Caution
• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord.
Doing so may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged,
consult a PENTAX Service Center.
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the
cord is plugged in.
• Do not handle the power plug with wet hands. This can cause an electric
shock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause
equipment breakdown.
•
Do not use the battery charger to charge batteries other than the rechargeable
lithium-ion battery D-LI90. Attempting to charge other types of batteries may
cause an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.
About the Battery
Warning
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not
rub them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention
immediately.
Caution
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may
cause an explosion or fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an
explosion or leakage.
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins
to smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts
of the battery.
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an
explosion or fire.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes,
it may cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with
water.
• Precautions for D-LI90 Battery Usage:
USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.
- DO NOT INCINERATE.
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
- DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.
- DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F / 60°C)
Keep the Camera and its Accessories out of
the Reach of Small Children
Warning
•
Do not place the camera and its accessories within the reach of small children.
1. If the product falls or is operated accidentally it may cause serious
personal injuries.
2. Wrapping the strap around a neck may cause suffocation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
3. To avoid the risk of a small accessory such as the battery or SD Memory
Cards from being swallowed by mistake, keep them out of the reach of
small children. Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is
accidentally swallowed.
Care to be Taken During Handling
Before Using Your Camera
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included
in the package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still
working properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a
wedding or when traveling). Contents of recording cannot be guaranteed if
recording, playback or transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not
possible due to a malfunction of your camera or recording media (SD
Memory Card), etc.
About the Battery and Charger
• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance.
Avoid storing in high temperatures.
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the
battery will over-discharge and shorten the battery’s usage life.
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.
• The AC plug cord provided with this camera is developed exclusively for the
battery charger D-BC90. Do not use it with other devices.
Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera
• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not
leave the camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.
• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a
cushion to protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles,
or ships.
• The temperature range for camera use is -10°C to 40°C (14°F to 104°F).
• The monitor may appear black at high temperatures, but will return to normal
at normal temperatures.
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to
liquid crystal properties, and is not a malfunction.
•
Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside
of the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, and remove the
camera after temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salt.
These could cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any
rain or water drops.
• Please do not press forcefully on the monitor. This could cause it to break or
malfunction.
•
Be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket when using a tripod.
Cleaning Your Camera
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol, or
benzine.
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder.
Never use a spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.
• Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the
CMOS sensor. (This will involve a fee.)
Storing Your Camera
• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in high
temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera.
Remove the camera from its case and store it in a dry and well-ventilated
place.
Other Precautions
• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain
high performance.
SD Memory Card.
• Please note that deleting data stored on an SD Memory Card, or formatting
an SD Memory Card does not completely erase the original data. Deleted
files can sometimes be recovered using commercially available software. It
is the user’s responsibility to ensure the privacy of such data.
Regarding Product Registration
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration, which
can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX website.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Contents
Viewfinder...........................................................................................35
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time
(Battery Fully Charged).......................................................................52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before
Shooting (Preview) .................................................................... 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera
Shake .......................................................................................... 139
Multi-exposure ..................................................................................155
Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically Changed (Exposure
Bracketing)........................................................................................157
Shooting while Adjusting Other Settings
(Extended Bracketing) ......................................................................160
Editing Movies ..................................................................................179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
(Resize) ............................................................................................262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor
(Pixel Mapping) .......................................................................... 311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Alert)........................................................................................341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Composition of the Operating Manual
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.
1
2
Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions of
various parts.
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to
read this chapter and follow the instructions.
3
Explains the procedures for taking and playing back pictures.
4
Explains the shooting-related functions.
5
Explains how to use the built-in flash and external flashes.
6
Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the file
format.
7
Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting pictures.
8
Explains the procedures for changing the image size, applying digital filters and
developing images taken in RAW format.
9
10
11
Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor
display settings and the image file naming convention.
Explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes installation
instructions and a general overview of the provided software.
Explains troubleshooting, introduces optional accessories and provides various
resources.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.
Indicates reference page number explaining a related operation.
1
Indicates useful information.
Indicates precautions to take when operating the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
X Characteristics
• Features a 23.7×15.7 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 16.28
million effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.
• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake
reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures with
minimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.
1
• Features an AF sensor with 11 focusing points. The central 9 focusing
points are wide cross area sensors.
•
Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera, with
a magnification of approximately 0.92 and field of view of approximately
100%, for easier manual focusing. Also features a superimpose function
in which the active AF point(s) on the viewfinder illuminate red.
• Features a large 3.0-inch monitor with approximately 921,000 dots, a
wide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting functions for
high-precision viewing performance.
• Features a Live View function for shooting while viewing the subject in
real-time on the monitor.
• Movies can be recorded by taking advantage of the lens properties. The
camera can also output composite and HDMI video signals so that you
can watch recorded images and movies on a TV or high-quality monitor.
• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of the
camera. The large text size, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use
menus make the camera easier to operate.
• The body exterior is magnesium alloy, and the dials, buttons, joints, and
retractable parts of the camera are dust-proof and water-resistant.
• Features Dust Removal function to shake the CMOS sensor and
remove the collected dust.
•
Features Hyper-program and Hyper-manual modes that let you take
pictures with the intended exposure. Also features Sensitivity Priority mode
K
that automatically adjusts aperture and shutter speed according to the
set sensitivity, and Shutter & Aperture Priority mode that automatically
adjusts sensitivity according to the set aperture and shutter speed.
L
• Features Digital Filters to internally process the image in the camera.
You can use digital filters such as Color or Soft while taking pictures or
to process images after taking them.
• Features Custom Image which allows you to adjust settings while
previewing the end result of the edited image, enabling a wider range of
photographic expression.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
• Records images in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully
editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record in
both formats simultaneously. When the file format of the last captured
image is JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory, you can
additionally save the image in RAW format. RAW images can be easily
processed internally by the camera.
1
• Up to five setting patterns can be saved in A mode. In addition,
functions for the |/Y button and the e-dials can also be
customized, enabling speedy operation by any type of photographer.
• Supports the optional Battery Grip D-BG4 with vertical shutter release
button. If a battery (D-LI90) is inserted in both the camera and grip, the
battery with more power is prioritized. This enables you to get the best
camera performance for an extended period. A menu item also allows
you to prioritize a battery and use its full power before switching to the
other battery.
Shake Reduction (SR)
Shake Reduction (SR) on the X features a PENTAX original
system which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at high
speeds, compensating for camera shake.
The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken,
such as when changing the composition of a picture. This is normal
and not a malfunction.
The captured area (view angle) will differ between the X and 35 mm SLR
cameras even if the same lens is used because the format sizes for 35 mm film
and CMOS sensor are different.
Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor
35 mm film
: 36×24 mm
X CMOS sensor : 23.7×15.7 mm
The focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera is about 1.5 times longer
than that of the X. To shoot images with an angle of view framing the same
area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.
Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm
camera
150÷1.5=100
Use a 100 mm lens with the X.
Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with the X by 1.5 to
determine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.
Example) If 300 mm lens is used with the X
300×1.5=450
Focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Checking the Contents of the
Package
The following accessories are packaged with your camera.
Check that all accessories are included.
1
Hot shoe cover FK
Eyecup FR
ME viewfinder cap
(Installed on camera)
(Installed on camera)
Triangular ring and
protective cover
(Installed on camera)
Sync socket 2P cap
(Installed on camera)
Body mount cover
(Installed on camera)
USB cable
I-USB7
AV cable
I-AVC7
Strap
O-ST53
Rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI90
Battery charger
D-BC90
AC plug cord
Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW110
Operating Manual
(this manual)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19
Names and Functions of Working
Parts
Built-in flash
Strap lug
Hot shoe
Strap lug
X-sync socket
Mirror
1
AF assist light
Card cover
Self-timer lamp
/Remote control receiver
AF coupler
Lens mount index
Lens unlock button
Lens information
contacts
Diopter adjustment
lever
Speaker
LCD Panel
Microphone
Viewfinder
Image plane
indicator
Microphone terminal
mini HDMI terminal
(Type C)
Self-timer lamp/
Remote control
receiver
PC/AV terminal
DC input terminal
Terminal cover
Monitor
Cable release
terminal
Card access
lamp
Battery cover
unlock knob
Tripod socket
Battery grip contacts
Battery cover
* In the first illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover FK
removed.
* In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover FK and
the Eyecup FR removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Capture Mode
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during shooting are noted.
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
1
0
a
b
6
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
c
d
1
2
m button
4 Main switch
Turn the rear e-dial (S)
while pressing this button to
set the EV compensation
Move to turn the power on/off
5 Front e-dial (R)
Changes the settings.
o button
6 Lens unlock button
Turn the rear e-dial (S)
while pressing this button to
set the ISO sensitivity. (p.95)
Press to detach a lens. (p.60)
3 Shutter release button
Press to capture images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21
7
E button
e Rear e-dial (S)
Press to pop up the built-in
flash. (p.79)
Changes the settings.
f
L button
8 Mode dial lock button
Records the exposure before
preview image.
Press to allow the mode dial to
be turned. (p.45)
1
9 Mode dial
g
| (Green) button
Switches the exposure
Sets the exposure mode to
Automatic Exposure and
resets the settings.
0 Metering mode
h AF point switching dial
switching lever
Sets the focusing area.
Changes the metering
method. (p.117)
i
= button
a
|/Y button
Sets the focusing area and
temporarily provides manual
focus. (p.124)
You can assign a function to
this button. (p.285)
b Focus mode lever
j
k
U button
Displays a Live View image.
Switches between autofocus
and manual focus mode
(p.132).
4 button
c
d
Q button
Switches to Playback mode.
When the control panel or a
menu screen is displayed,
press this button to confirm
the selected item.
M button
When the AF point switching
dial is set to j (Select),
press this button to enable or
disable changing the AF point.
Turns the status screen
display on the monitor on/off.
Switches to the control panel
when the status screen is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
l Four-way controller
m
3 button
(2345)
Displays the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu (p.89). Next, press the
four-way controller (5) to
display other menus.
Displays the Drive Mode/Flash
Mode/White Balance/Custom
Image setup menu. (p.88)
1
When the control panel or a
menu screen is displayed, use
this to move the cursor or
change items.
When the AF point switching dial
is set to
j
(Select), use this
Playback Mode
Functions of buttons, dials and lever used during playback are noted.
1
2
3
4
8
9
0
5
6
a
b
7
c
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23
1
m button
9
L button
Press in the enlarged view to
increase the magnification.
When the file format of the last
captured image is JPEG, and
its data still remains in the
buffer memory, press this
button to additionally save the
image in RAW format. (p.84)
2 Shutter release button
1
Press halfway to switch to
Capture mode.
0
a
| (Green) button
Press in the enlarged view to
decrease the magnification.
3 Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
position to switch to Capture
mode and preview.
4 button
Confirms the setting you
selected in the menu screen
or playback screen.
4 Front e-dial (R)
Use this to display the next or
previous image.
b Four-way controller
5
6
i button
(2345)
When a menu screen or
playback screen is displayed,
use this to move the cursor or
change items.
Q button
Press to switch to Capture
mode.
Press the four-way controller
(3) to display the playback
mode palette. (p.234)
7
M button
Press to display the shooting
information on the monitor.
c
3 button
8 Rear e-dial (S)
Press to display the
[Q Playback 1] menu
(p.235). Next, press the four-
way controller (5) to display
other menus.
Use this to change the
magnification in the enlarged
multiple images at the same
References to Button Names
In this Operating Manual, the buttons of the four-
way controller are referred to in the following way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Display Indicators
Monitor
1
The various information
appears on the monitor
depending on the status of the
camera.
Monitor
At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial
Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds (default setting) when the
camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned.
Program
Automatic Exposure
P
1
RAW RAW
P
Tv
Av
2
AF Cancel AF
09/09/2010
10:30AM
3
4
1
2
Guide indicator
3
4
World Time (p.289)
* 3 appears only when [World Time] is set to [Destination].
• When the mode dial is set to A, the screen for selecting the USER mode
is displayed for 30 seconds regardless of the [Guide Display] setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Capture Mode
While shooting, the status screen is displayed showing the current
shooting function settings. You can change the type of the screen
displayed by pressing the M button.
1
ISO AUTO Setting
Adjustment Range
AF.S
P
M
1/2000 F2.8
ISO
200-1600
OFF
11
AUTO
0.0
ISO
AUTO 1600
OFF
OFF
0
0
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
-5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
JPEG
16M
AWB
[
]
[
]
JPEG 16M
37
37
Status screen
Control panel
M
M
M
Blank
Electronic level display
[Electronic Level] is P (Off) by default. Set in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Status screen
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may
differ.)
USER
1
2
9
3
4
5
6
7
AF.S
P
SHIFT
1/2000 F2.8
10
1
8
8
8
22
+1.0
G1A1
ISO
11
12
14
AUTO
1600
23
24
25
13
8
-
5 4 3 2 1
1 2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
15
19
16
20
17
21
18
JPEG
[
]
16M
1234
1
2
3
14 EV bar
4
Horizon Correction (p.140)
5
6
7
8
9
Battery level (p.52)
E-dial guide
22 Flash Exposure Compensation
Shutter speed
Cross Processing (p.225)
10 Aperture value
11 ISO/ISO AUTO
25 Remaining image storage
capacity/| button guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
Control panel
Press the M button in the status screen to display the control panel and change
settings.
ISO AUTO Setting
1
Adjustment Range
1
ISO
2
5
3
7
200-1600
OFF
11
AUTO
OFF
OFF
4
8
6
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
9
10
14
11
15
12
13
JPEG
16M
[
]
16
17
37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Function name
ISO AUTO Setting (p.96)
15 Shake Reduction/
Lateral Chromatic Aberration
16 Current date and time
8
9
17 Remaining image storage
capacity
• Settings that cannot be changed due to the current camera setup cannot be
selected.
status screen is not displayed. The control panel turns on and off each time
the M button is pressed.
• On the status screen, the setting currently being changed or guide display for
the buttons that can be operated are displayed in blue (when [Status Screen]
• The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30
seconds. Press the M button to display it again.
• If no operations are made within 30 seconds in the control panel, the status
screen will reappear.
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed on
the status screen and in the control panel. Even if the number of recordable
images is 10,000 or more, [9999] is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Electronic level display
This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether
the camera is level. When [Electronic Level] is set to O (On), press
the M button while the control panel is displayed to view the
electronic level. When [Electronic Level] is assigned to the |/Y
button, press the |/Y button to switch the display on/off.
A bar graph indicating the horizontal camera angle appears at the
bottom of the screen, and a bar graph indicating the vertical camera
angle appears on the right side.
1
Example:
Horizontally and vertically
level (green)
Tilted 1.5° to the left (yellow)
Vertically level (green)
Outside horizontal level
display (red)
Tilted 5° up (yellow)
Horizontally level (green)
Outside vertical level
display (red)
• [Electronic Level] is P (Off) by default. Set in the [A Rec. Mode 4]
• The electronic level display will disappear if no operations are made
within 1 minute.
• If the camera angle cannot be detected, both ends and the center of
the bar graphs flash red.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
29
When holding the camera vertically
If the camera is held vertically while measuring
the brightness, the status screen or control
panel is displayed vertically. The directions of
the four-way controller (2345) also change
to match the orientation of the camera.
To always display the contents of the screen
horizontally, set in [Status Screen] of the [R
Set-up 1] menu. (p.295)
ISO AUTO Setting
Adjustment Range
ISO
200-1600
OFF
AUTO
1
OFF
11
OFF
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
JPEG
16M
[
]
1234
Playback Mode
The camera switches the types of information display when you press the
M button during playback.
Standard
Captured image, file format, and guides are displayed.
Captured image and histogram (Brightness/RGB) are
displayed. Not available during movie playback. (p.32)
Histogram display
Detailed
Detailed information on how and when the image was taken
No info. display Only captured image is displayed.
100-0001
100-0001
AE-L RAW
AE-L RAW
M
1/2000 F5.6
ISO
200
1/
2000 F5.6 ISO 200
JPEG
Standard
Histogram display
M
M
100-0001
P
M
24mm
0
0
AF.A
1/
ON
ON
ON
2000
0
0
0
F2.8
ISO 200
+1.5
-0.5
G2A1
JPEG 16M
AdobeRGB
09/09/2010 10:00AM
No info. display
Detailed information display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
The type of information display that is shown first during playback is the same
as that of the last playback in the previous session. If [Playback Info Display] is
screen is always displayed first when the camera is turned on.
Detailed information display
1
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between pages.
Page 1
Still Picture
1
3
7
4
5
6
100-0001
P
2
30
31
8
10
0
0
9
24mm
AF.A
1/
2000
11 12
ON
ON
ON
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
0
0
0
20
23
21
24
22
25
F2.8
ISO 200
+1.5
-0.5
G2A1
26 27 28
32
29
33
JPEG 16M
AdobeRGB
09/09/2010 10:00AM
Movie
3
5
6
100-0001
2
30
31
10min10sec
34
0
0
0
0
0
24
14 38
25
35 36
20
MONO
G2A1
OFF
37
F2.8
FullHD
26 27 28
32
4
Movie
25
09/09/2010 10:00AM
2
3
2
3
Page 2
Still Picture/Movie
1
5
6
100-0001
2
39
39
40
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
31
1
2
3
4
Captured image
20 Aperture value
22 Flash Exposure Compensation
Shake Reduction/
Horizon Correction (p.140)
1
5
6
Protect (p.254)
Folder number-File number
7
8
9
Drive Mode (p.88)
Flash Mode (p.77)
Focal Length
31 Custom Image parameters
13 Shutter speed
32 Shooting date and time
34 Recording time
36 Sound type
37 Drive Mode (Remote Control)
39 Information tampering warning
19 Lateral Chromatic Aberration
* For images taken during Live View using Face Detection AF or Contrast AF,
the autofocus method is displayed for indicator 10.
* Indicators 8 and 22 appear only for images taken with the flash.
* Indicators 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 33, and 38 appear only for images taken with
the corresponding functions enabled.
* Indicators 27 and 28 do not appear for RAW images.
* Indicator 39 appears only for images whose information was tampered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Histogram display
The following histograms can be displayed when playing back still
pictures. The “Brightness histogram” shows the distribution of brightness
and the “RGB histogram” shows the distribution of color intensity. Press
the four-way controller (23) to switch between “Brightness histogram”
and “RGB histogram”.
1
1
2
3
4
2
3
100-0001
100-0001
AE-L RAW
4
23
23
11
12
13
AE-L RAW
5
1
5
1/2000 F5.6 ISO 200
1/2000 F5.6 ISO 200
6
7
8
9
10
6
7
8
9
10
Brightness histogram
RGB histogram
1
2
3
4
Histogram (Brightness)
Protect
Folder number-File number
Additionally saving in RAW
format
7
8
9
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Sensitivity
10 DPOF settings
11 Histogram (R)
12 Histogram (G)
13 Histogram (B)
5
6
Switch RGB histogram/
Brightness histogram
File Format
* Indicator 2 appears only for protected images.
* Indicator 4 appears only when the file format of the last captured image is
JPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory. (p.84)
areas affected by bright or dark portions blink (except when in RGB histogram
display and Detailed information display).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
Using the Histogram
A histogram shows the brightness
distribution of an image. The
horizontal axis represents brightness
(dark at the left and bright at the right)
and the vertical axis represents the
number of pixels.
1
The shape and the distribution of the
histogram before and after shooting
tells you whether the exposure level
and contrast are correct or not, and
(Dark) ←Brightness→ (Bright)
Dark portions Bright portions
lets you decide if you need to adjust the exposure and take a picture again.
Understanding Brightness
When the brightness is correct and there are no overly bright or dark
areas, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is too dark, the peak is
on the left side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on the right side.
Dark image
Image with few bright or
dark areas
Bright image
When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions with
no detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off
(bright portions with no detail).
Bright portions blink red and dark portions blink yellow on the monitor
when [Bright/Dark Area] is O (On).
Understanding Color Balance
Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB
histogram. The right side of the graphs look similar for images that have
White Balance adjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, that
color is too intense.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
Guide Indicators
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys,
buttons and e-dials that can be operated at that time.
Example:
1
2
3
Four-way controller (2)
Four-way controller (3)
Four-way controller (4)
Four-way controller (5)
Front e-dial
4 button
|
Green button
L button
i button
4
5
R
S
Shutter release button
|/Y button
Rear e-dial
3 button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
Viewfinder
The following information appears in the viewfinder.
2
3
1
1
1
4 5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12
13
14 15 16 17 18 19
1
2
3
4
AF frame (p.61)
Spot metering frame (p.118)
Flash indicator (p.77)
Lit:
when the flash is available.
Blinks: when the flash is recommended but not set or is being charged.
5
6
Appears when the focus mode is set to \.
Shutter speed
Underlined when the shutter speed can be adjusted.
Displays a countdown of processing time when the Noise Reduction
7
8
9
Aperture value
Underlined when the aperture value can be adjusted.
Focus indicator (p.72)
Lit:
when the subject is focused.
Blinks: when the subject is not in focus.
EV bar
Displays the EV compensation values or difference between the
appropriate and current exposure values when the exposure mode is set to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
10 ISO/ISO AUTO
Appears when the sensitivity is displayed.
11 Sensitivity/Remaining image storage capacity
Underlined when the sensitivity can be adjusted.
Displays the number of recordable images immediately after shooting.
Displays the compensation value while adjusting the EV compensation.
Displays the amount of deviation from the correct exposure when the
exposure mode is set to a or M and [Electronic Level] is set to O (On).
1
Appears while the AE Lock function is activated.
Appears when the AF point can be changed with the AF point switching dial
set to j (Select).
Appears when Multi-exposure is set.
Appears when the metering method is M (Center-weighted metering) or
N (Spot metering).
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
Appears when the flash exposure compensation is in use.
Appears when adjusting the EV compensation or when the drive mode is
set to [Exposure Bracketing].
Displays the image save format in RAW/RAW+ format.
Not displayed in JPEG format.
• The AF point(s) in use for autofocus appear in red (Superimpose AF Area)
• When [Cancel AF] is assigned to [AF Button] in [Button Customization] of the
[A Rec. Mode 5] menu, \ is displayed in the viewfinder while the =
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed
in the viewfinder. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more,
[9999] is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37
LCD Panel
The following information appears in the LCD panel on top of the camera.
1
3 4
5
1
2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
Shutter speed/
Countdown of Noise Reduction
processing time (p.98)
b
: Built-in flash is ready
(when blinking, flash
should be used)
Aperture value
nr
:
Noise Reduction is
>
3
: Red-eye Reduction
: Auto Flash Discharge
3
4
5
Q : Slow-speed Sync
E
: Trailing Curtain Sync
: Wireless
w
Electronic Level (p.38)
6
9
j
g
W
: Single Frame Shooting
: Continuous Shooting
: Self-timer Shooting
7
8
Battery level (p.52)
Flash Exposure Compensation
:
Remote Control Shooting
: RAW capture
9
Sensitivity/EV compensation
value
1
1P: RAW+JPEG capture
14 Remaining image storage
capacity/USB Connection mode
10 ISO/ISO AUTO
Appears when the sensitivity is
displayed.
Pc-S : MSC mode
Pc-P : PTP mode
LCD panel is illuminated when the exposure metering is performed. You can
choose [High], [Low] or [Off] for LCD panel backlight in [22. LCD Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Electronic level display
When the camera is not level, a bar graph indicating the horizontal
camera angle is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
1
When level (at 0°)
When tilted 5° to the left
When held vertically and tilted 3° to the right
• [Electronic Level] is P (Off) by default. Set in the [A Rec. Mode 4]
• The composition can also be adjusted in the camera when the camera
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
How to Change Function Settings
Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, control panel or
menus. Some functions can be changed using both the control panel and
menus.
1
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.
Using the Direct Keys
In Capture mode, you can set Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balance and
Below, how to set [Flash Mode] is explained as an example.
1
Press the four-way controller (3)
in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a flash mode.
Flash Mode
Flash On
0.0
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
While direct key operation is enabled, the guide indicators for the direct keys
is set to [Display Color 1]). Direct key operation is not available when the AF
point switching dial is set to j and the AF point is being changed. In such
1
Using the Control Panel
While shooting, the current settings can be checked on the status screen.
You can also switch the display to the control panel and change settings.
Following, how to set [JPEG Quality] is explained as an example.
1
Check the status screen and then
press the M button.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status
screen is not displayed.
AF.S
P
1/2000
F
2.8
0.0
0 0
ISO
AUTO 1600
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
[
]
JPEG 16M
37
2
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select an item you
want to change the setting for.
ISO AUTO Setting
Adjustment Range
ISO
200-1600
OFF
11
AUTO
OFF
OFF
You cannot select items that cannot be
changed in a given camera status.
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
JPEG
16M
[
]
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
3
4
Use the front e-dial (R) or rear
e-dial (S) to change the
setting.
JPEG Quality
ISO
200-1600
OFF
11
AUTO
OFF
HDR
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1
JPEG
16M
[
]
37
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the status screen
and is ready to take a picture.
• Press the 4 button in Step 3 to display the detailed setting screen for the
selected item. Make the detailed settings for functions such as Extended
Bracketing and Digital Filter on the detailed setting screen.
• The status screen and control panel are not displayed when Live View
Mode] menu in advance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Using the Menus
This section explains how to use the menus: [A Rec. Mode],
[Q Playback], [R Set-up] and [A Custom Setting] menus.
Following, how to set [Program Line] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu is
explained as an example.
1
1
Press the 3 button in
Capture mode.
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on
the monitor.
If the
3
button is pressed in
Playback mode, the [
menu appears.
Q
Playback 1]
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
twice or turn the rear e-dial (S)
two clicks to the right (toward
y).
1
2
3
4
5
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
Lens Correction
JPEG
16M
11
Each time the four-way controller (5) is
pressed, the menu will change in the
following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 2],
[A Rec. Mode 3], [A Rec. Mode 4],
MENU
Exit
[A Rec. Mode 5], [Q Playback 1] … [A Rec. Mode 1].
When the front e-dial (R) is turned to the right, the menu will change
in the following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 1], [Q Playback 1],
[R Set-up 1], [A Custom Setting 1].
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose an item.
1
2
3
4 5
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
ISO
NR
AUTO
AUTO
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
NR
Color Space
RAW File Format
sRGB
PEF
MENU
Exit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
43
4
5
6
7
Press the four-way controller
(5).
1
2
3
4 5
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
ISO
NR
Available settings are displayed.
AUTO
AUTO
NR
The frame moves to the pop-up menu if
there is one. When there is a submenu, it
is displayed.
1
Color Space
RAW File Format
sRGB
PEF
MENU
Exit
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a setting.
1
2
3
4 5
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
Color Space
RAW File Format
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Press the 3 button if a submenu is
displayed.
Next, set other items.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu appears again.
Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, your
settings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as by
removing the battery while the camera is on).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
• You can select whether to display the menu tab selected the last time first, or
• Refer to the following pages for details on each menu.
• [A Rec. Mode] menu
• [Q Playback] menu
• [R Set-up] menu
1p.89
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45
Using the Mode Dial
You can switch the exposure modes by setting the icons on the mode dial
to the dial indicator.
Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock button.
1
Dial indicator
Mode dial
Mode dial lock button
Mode
Characteristics
Page
Lets you capture images with the saved exposure
mode. Up to five settings can be saved.
A
Lets you capture images with fully automatic
settings.
B
Green
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper exposure according to
Program Line when taking pictures. You can use
the front and rear e-dials to switch between shutter
priority and aperture priority.
e
Hyper-program
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture
set sensitivity.
K
Sensitivity Priority
b
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for
Shutter Priority
expressing the movement of the subject.
c
Lets you set the desired aperture value for
Aperture Priority
controlling the depth of field.
L
Automatically sets the sensitivity to obtain a proper
Priority
value according to the brightness of the subject.
a
Lets you set the shutter speed and aperture value
to capture the picture with creative intent.
Hyper-manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
Mode
Characteristics
Page
p
Bulb
Lets you capture images that require slow shutter
speeds such as fireworks and night scenes.
M
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 second. Use
this when using an external flash that does not
automatically set the sync speed.
Flash X-sync
Speed
1
C
Movie
Use this to record movies.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
Attaching the Strap
1
Pass the end of the strap through
the protective cover and
triangular ring.
2
2
Secure the end of the strap on the inside of the clasp.
3
Attach the other end of the strap in the same manner as
described above.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49
Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery into the camera. Use only a D-LI90 battery.
Charging the Battery
2
When using the battery for the first time, or when the battery has not been
used in a long time, or when [Battery depleted] appears, recharge the
battery.
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible
cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”
Indicator lamp
Lithium-ion battery
3
2
AC plug cord
1
Battery charger
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
2
3
Face the 2 mark on the exclusive battery up and insert it
into the battery charger.
The indicator lamp is lit during charging and turns off when the battery is
fully charged.
4
When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery from
the battery charger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
•
Do not use the provided battery charger D-BC90 to charge batteries other than
rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90. Charging other batteries may cause
damage or heating.
• If the battery is correctly oriented and inserted into the battery charger but the
indicator lamp is not lit, the battery is faulty. Use a new battery in the camera.
• The maximum charging time is approximately 390 minutes (it depends on
temperature and remaining battery power.) Charge in a location where the
temperature is between 0°C and 40°C.
• If battery usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery has
reached the end of its life. Use a new battery in the camera.
2
Inserting/Removing the Battery
When using the battery for the first time, charge the battery and insert it into
the camera.
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The
battery may leak.
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you install a new battery
after a long time has passed since the battery was removed, follow the
• Insert the battery correctly. Batteries inserted incorrectly may cause a
camera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth
before inserting.
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera is
used continuously for a long period of time.
1
Open the battery cover.
2
1
Lift the battery cover unlock knob, turn it
towards OPEN (1) to unlock, and then
pull the cover open (2).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
51
2
3
Face the 2 mark on the battery towards outside of the
camera, push the battery lock lever in the direction of the
arrow (3) and insert the battery.
Insert until the battery locks.
To remove the battery, push the
battery lock lever in the direction
of the arrow (3) with your finger.
2
3
Remove the battery when it pops
out slightly.
Battery lock lever
Close the battery cover (4) and
4
turn the battery cover unlock
5
knob towards CLOSE (5) to
lock.
Stow the battery cover unlock knob after
closing the battery cover.
Use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using the camera for a
prolonged period. (p.53)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Battery Level Indicator
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the w/A
displayed on the status screen and LCD panel.
Status
LCD Panel
Battery Level
Screen
w (Green)
x (Green)
y (Yellow)
z (Red)
A
Battery is full.
2
B
Battery is close to full.
Battery is running low.
Battery is almost empty.
C
D lit
The camera turns off after displaying the
message.
(D continues blinking on the LCD
panel.)
[Battery depleted]
D blinks
• y, z (red), C or D may appear even when the battery level is
sufficient if the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing
continuous shooting for a long period of time. In this situation, turn the
camera off and on again. If w or A appears, you can use the camera.
• W is displayed when using the AC adapter.
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and
Playback Time (Battery Fully Charged)
Flash Photography
Normal
Recording
Battery
D-LI90
Playback Time
(Temperature)
(23°C)
50% Use
740
100% Use
610
980
810
440 minutes
400 minutes
( 0°C)
680
560
The image storage capacity (normal recording, flash use 50%) is based on
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards, while other data is
based on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may
occur in actual use depending on shooting mode and shooting conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
53
• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries on hand and
keep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normal
when returned to room temperature.
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold
climates, or taking a lot of pictures.
2
Using the AC Adapter (Optional)
We recommend the use of the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when
using the monitor for a long time or when connecting the camera to a
computer or AV device.
1
Make sure the camera is turned off.
Open the terminal cover.
2
3
Face the 2 mark on the DC
terminal of the AC adapter
towards the 2 mark on the
camera, and connect the DC
terminal to the DC input terminal
of the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
4
5
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.
Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the
AC adapter.
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Card
or data may be corrupted if disconnected while the card is being accessed.
2
• Be sure to read the manual of the AC adapter kit K-AC50 when using the AC
adapter.
• The battery in your camera will not charge when connected to the AC
adapter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory
Card
This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card
(commercially available). Both cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards
hereafter. Make sure the camera is turned off before inserting or removing
the SD Memory Card.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or
has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting the
SD Memory Card” (p.281) for details on formatting.
2
• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If a write speed
cannot keep up with a recording speed, the writing may stop during
recording.
1
Make sure the camera is turned off.
2
Slide the card cover in the
direction of the arrow and then
lift it to open (1´2).
1
2
3
Insert the card all the way with
the SD Memory Card label facing
toward the monitor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Push the SD Memory Card in once to
remove.
2
4
Close the card cover (3) and
then slide it in the direction of the
arrow (4).
4
3
Be sure to fully close the card cover. The camera will not turn on if the card
cover is open.
Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a
write-protect switch. Setting the switch to
LOCK prevents new data from being
recorded on the card, the stored data from
being deleted, and the card from being
formatted by the camera or computer.
Write-protect
switch
• The SD Memory Card may be hot when removing the card immediately after
using the camera.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn off the power while the card is
being accessed. This may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away
from water and store away from high temperatures.
•
Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be
damaged and become unusable.
• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances.
We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted if
(1) the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.
(2) the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
(3) the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.
(4) the SD Memory Card or the battery is removed while the card is being
accessed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
57
• If the SD Memory Card is not used for a long time, the data on the card may
become unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on
a computer.
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity or
electrical interference.
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be
exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards used with other
cameras.
2
• The data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own risk.
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
When the File Format is JPEG
Choose the number of recorded pixels (size) and quality level (JPEG data
compression rate) of pictures according to how you intend to use the
pictures you have taken.
Pictures with larger recorded pixels or more stars (
E) are clearer when printed.
However, the number of pictures that can be taken (the number of pictures that
can be recorded on an SD Memory Card) decreases with larger file sizes.
The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality
level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of other
factors so you do not need to select more than the required number of
pixels. For example, to print in postcard size, i (1728×1152) is
adequate. Set the appropriate recorded pixels and quality level depending
on how the picture will be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
JPEG Recorded Pixels, JPEG Quality and Approximate Image
Storage Capacity
(When using a 2 GB SD Memory Card)
JPEG Quality
Z
C
D
E
Premium
Best
Better
Good
JPEG Rec. Pixels
(4928×3264)
134
208
214
332
379
585
749
1138
1807
5121
p
J
P
i
(3936×2624)
(3072×2048)
(1728×1152)
2
339
543
945
1041
1617
2793
• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting
conditions, shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders containing 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracketing,
images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the
number of images exceeds 500.
When the File Format is RAW
With the X, you can record in the versatile JPEG format or the high
quality and editable RAW format. For RAW file format, you can select
PENTAX’s original PEF format or general-purpose DNG (Digital Negative)
format designed by Adobe Systems. On a 2 GB SD Memory Card, you can
record up to 58 images in either PEF or DNG format.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
59
Attaching a Lens
Attach a proper lens to the camera’s body.
When you use one of the following lenses with the X, all the camera’s
exposure modes will be available.
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses
(b) Lenses with an s (Auto) position, when used in the s position
2
Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent
unexpected lens movement.
• When lenses described in (b) are used in a position other than s, some
functions will be restricted. Refer to “Notes on [27. Using Aperture Ring]”
• With factory default setting, the camera will not work with lenses other than
1
Make sure the camera is turned off.
2
Remove the body mount cover
(1) and lens mount cover (2).
Be sure to put the lens down with the lens
mount side facing upward to protect the
lens mount from damage.
3
Align the Lens mount index (red
dots; 3) on the camera and the
lens, and secure by turning the
lens clockwise until it clicks.
After attaching, turn the lens
counterclockwise to check that the lens is
locked in place.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
4
Remove the front lens cap by
pushing the indicated portions
inward.
2
To detach the lens, hold down the lens
unlock button (4) and turn the lens
counterclockwise.
4
• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and
malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts and
an AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.
When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.
The body mount cover (1) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust when
shipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
61
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
Adjust the viewfinder diopter to suit your eyesight.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, slide the diopter
adjustment lever sideways.
You can adjust the diopter from approximately -2.5 to +1.5 m-1.
2
1
Look through the viewfinder and
slide the diopter adjustment lever
left or right.
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the
viewfinder is focused.
Point the camera at a white wall or other
bright and consistent surface.
AF frame
• The Eyecup FR is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera leaves
the factory. Diopter can be adjusted with the Eyecup FR attached. However,
adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.
• To remove the Eyecup FR, pull it out in the
direction of the arrow.
To attach the Eyecup FR, align it with the
groove on the viewfinder eyepiece and
push it into the position.
• If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image
clearly even if you use the diopter
adjustment lever, use the optional diopter
correction lens adapter M. However, the
Eyecup FR must be removed to use this
adapter. (p.348)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
Turning the Camera On and Off
1
Turn the main switch to [ON].
The camera will turn on.
Set the main switch to the position [OFF]
to turn off the camera.
2
• Always turn the camera off when not in use.
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations
within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera, turn it on again or
perform any of the following.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
- Press the Q button, 3 button or M button.
• By default, the camera is set to turn off automatically after 1 minute of
inactivity. You can change the setting in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3]
menu. (p.304)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
63
Initial Settings
The first time the camera is turned on after
purchasing, the [Language/u] screen
appears on the monitor. Follow the
procedure below to set the language
displayed on the monitor and the current
date and time. Once these settings are
made, you will not need to set them again
next time you turn on your camera.
2
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears, set
the date and time by following the procedure
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
24h
mm/dd / yy
01 / 01 / 2010
:
Time
00 00
Settings complete
Cancel
MENU
Setting the Display Language
You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish,
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.
1
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select the desired
language.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
2
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the
selected language.
Initial Setting
English
Press the four-way controller (3) twice and
(Hometown) does not have to be changed.
New York
Text Size
Standard
Settings complete
Cancel
2
MENU
3
4
5
Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to W.
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [W Hometown] screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a city.
Hometown
New York
DST
10:00
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
6
Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [DST] (daylight saving time).
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
8
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.
9
Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [Text Size].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
65
10 Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Standard] or
[Large].
Initial Setting
English
New York
Text Size
Standard
Large
Selecting [Large] increases the text size
of the selected menu items.
Settings complete
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
2
11 Press the 4 button.
12 Press the four-way controller (3)
Initial Setting
to select [Settings complete].
English
New York
Text Size
Standard
Settings complete
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
13 Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.
In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set
to [Standard].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
When the Wrong Language is Set
If you mistakenly select the wrong language in the [Language/u]
screen and proceed to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can perform
the following operation to set the language back.
If you have proceeded to switch the camera to Capture mode (and the
camera is ready to take a picture), perform the following operation from
Step 2 to set the language back.
2
1
Press the
display the guides on the monitor.
3
button once to
ίυ Έρθ ু൲Ⴚ
P
The screen shown on the right is an
example of the guides displayed. The
displayed screen will vary depending on
the selected language.
RAW RAW
AF AF΅λ ϋΓσ
P
Tv
Av
The guides appear on the monitor for 3
seconds.
2010/01/01 10:30AM
2
3
Press the 3 button once.
[A 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
Press the four-way controller (5) six times.
[R 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
4
5
Press the four-way controller (
3
) to select [Language/u].
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Language/u] screen appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the
desired language and press the 4 button.
The [R Set-up 1] menu in the selected language appears.
Refer to the following pages and set the desired city for [Hometown]
and the current date and time as necessary.
• When the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting]
screen or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed again next time the
camera is turned on.
• If you have not proceeded to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can reselect
a language using the four-way controller (5) in the [Language/u] screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
67
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time and the display style.
1
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].
2
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose the date format.
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
24h
mm/dd / yy
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/
mm/dd].
01 / 01 / 2010
:
Time
00 00
Settings complete
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [24h].
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select 24h (24-hour display) or
12h (12-hour display).
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
24h
mm/dd / yy
01 / 01 / 2010
:
Time
00 00
Settings complete
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
5
6
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Date Format].
Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Date].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
7
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to the month.
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to set the month.
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
24h
mm/dd / yy
Set the day and year in the same manner.
Next, set the time.
01 / 01 / 2010
2
:
Time
00 00
If you select [12h] in Step 4, the camera
switches between am and pm depending
on the time.
Settings complete
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
9
Press the four-way controller (3)
to select [Settings complete].
Date Adjustment
Date Format
Date
24h
mm/dd / yy
09 / 09 / 2010
:
Time
00 00
Settings complete
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
10 Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.
If you set the date and time from the menu, the screen will return to the
[R Set-up 1] menu. In this case, press the 3 button.
Pressing the 3 button while setting the date and time cancels the settings
made up to that point and switches the camera to Capture mode. After initial
settings are complete, if the camera power is turned off before the date and
time settings are complete, the [Date Adjustment] screen will appear first next
time you turn the camera on. In this case, you can also set the date and time
• When you press the 4 button in Step 10, the seconds value is set to 0. To
set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV,
radio, etc.) reaches 0 seconds.
• You can change the language and date and time settings from the menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Basic Operations
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by
setting mode dial to Green mode (automatic exposure
according to the program line set to j) to ensure
successful capturing.
For information about advanced functions and settings for
taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
Basic Shooting Operation
Holding the Camera
How you hold the camera is important when taking pictures.
• Hold the camera firmly with both hands and keep your elbows close
to your body.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture.
3
Horizontal position
Vertical position
• To reduce camera shake, support your body or the camera on a solid object
such as a table, tree, or wall.
• Although there are individual differences among photographers, the slowest
possible shutter speed for a handheld camera is generally 1/(focal length
×1.5). For example, it is 1/75 of a second for a focal length of 50 mm and 1/
150 of a second for 100 mm. Use a tripod or the Shake Reduction function
• When using a telephoto lens, a tripod that is heavier than the total weight of
the camera and lens is recommended to avoid camera shake.
• Do not use the Shake Reduction function when using the camera on a tripod.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
71
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal
Settings
The X features various exposure modes, focus modes, and drive
modes for expressing your photographic vision. This section explains how
to take pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.
1
Set the mode dial to B.
Turn the mode dial while pressing the
mode dial lock button.
3
The exposure mode changes to B
(Green) mode. In B, a proper exposure
is determined by the camera and the
shutter speed and aperture value are
automatically set.
Mode dial lock button
2
Set the focus mode lever to
l.
The focus mode changes to l
(Autofocus/Single) mode. When the
shutter release button is pressed halfway
in l, the camera focuses
automatically. (p.122)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
3
4
Look through the viewfinder to
view the subject.
A zoom lens can be used to change the
size of the subject in the viewfinder. (p.76)
Position the subject inside the
AF frame and press the shutter
release button halfway.
3
The autofocus system operates. The
focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when the subject comes into
focus.
AF assist light turns on in a dark or backlit
location, but the flash does not pop up
automatically. If the flash is necessary,
the flash status E blinks in the viewfinder.
Press the E button to pop up the flash.
Flash
status
Focus indicator
5
Press the shutter release button
fully.
The picture is taken.
This action is referred to as “releasing the
shutter” or “release”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
73
6
Review the captured image on
the monitor.
The image appears for 1 second on the
monitor shortly after capturing (Instant
Review).
You can magnify the image during Instant
You can delete the image during Instant
3
Review by pressing the i button.
Delete
• You can set the camera so that pressing the = button will focus
automatically, in the same way as pressing the shutter release button
• You can display the Optical Preview and check the composition, exposure,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
Operating the shutter release button
The shutter release button has two working positions.
Not pressed
Pressed halfway
Pressed fully
(first position) (second position)
3
Pressing it down halfway (first position) displays the indicators in the
viewfinder and the autofocus system operates. Pressing it fully
(second position) takes a picture.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent
camera shake.
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn
where the first position and second position are.
• The viewfinder indicators are displayed while the shutter release button
is pressed halfway. The indicators are displayed for about 10 seconds
(default setting) while the exposure metering timer is on after you take
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
75
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
The autofocus mechanism is not perfect. Focusing may be difficult
when taking pictures under the following conditions. These also apply
to manual focusing using the focus indicator ] in the viewfinder.
(a) Extremely low-contrast subjects such as a white wall in the
focusing area
(b) Subjects which do not reflect much light within the focusing
area
(c) Fast moving objects
3
(d) Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright
background)
(e) If repeating vertical or horizontal line patterns appear within
the focusing area
(f) Multiple subjects in the foreground and background within the
focusing area
If the subject cannot be focused automatically, set the focus mode
lever to \ and use the manual focus mode to focus on the subject
The subject may not be focused even when the ] (focus indicator) is
displayed when (e) and (f) above apply.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
Using a Zoom Lens
Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) with
a zoom lens. Adjust the subject to the desired size and take pictures.
1
Turn the zoom ring to the right or
left.
Turn the zoom ring clockwise for
telephoto and counterclockwise for wide
angle.
3
Wide Angle
Telephoto
• The smaller the number displayed for the focal length, the wider the angle.
The larger the number, the more magnified the image appears.
• Power Zoom (Auto Zoom) is available if a Power Zoom compatible FA lens
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
77
Using the Built-in Flash
Use the following procedures to take pictures in low light or backlit
conditions and when you want to use the built-in flash.
The built-in flash is optimum for a subject at a distance from 0.7 m to 5 m.
Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting (darkening of the
corners of the image due to a lack of light) may occur when used at a
distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly depending on the
3
Compatibility of built-in flash and lens
Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and the
capture conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to check the
compatibility.
• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.
• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without a function to set the
lens aperture ring to s (Auto).
For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with an
Setting the Flash Mode
Flash Mode
Function
Auto Flash
Discharge
Discharges the flash automatically in dark or backlit
conditions.
C
Auto Flash+
Red-eye Reduction the automatic flash.
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before
D
E
Flash On
Discharges the flash for each picture.
Flash On+
Red-eye Reduction the main flash.
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before
F
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
Flash Mode
Function
Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on the
brightness. For example, when using this to shoot a
portrait with the sunset in the background, both the
person and the background are captured beautifully.
Slow-speed Sync
G
H
Slow-speed Sync+ Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before
Red-eye Reduction the main flash is discharged with Slow-speed Sync.
Discharges the flash immediately before closing the
shutter curtain. Captures moving objects as if they
Trailing Curtain
Sync
I
k
You can synchronize a dedicated external flash
(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a sync
cord. (p.190)
3
Wireless Mode
r
The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the exposure mode.
Exposure Mode
Selectable Flash Mode
C/D
Restrictions
B
No flash compensation
e/c/K
b/L/a/p
M
E/F/G/H/I/r
E/F/k/r
-
-
-
E/F/r
A
According to the saved settings
1
Press the four-way controller (3)
in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
The flash modes that can be selected for
the set exposure mode appear.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a flash mode.
Flash Mode
Flash On
When not in B (Green) mode, turn the
rear e-dial (S) to perform the flash
exposure compensation. (p.82)
0.0
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
79
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Using Built-in Flash
3
1
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up and begins
charging. When the flash is fully charged,
E appears in the viewfinder and on the
2
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
When the mode dial is at B, the flash is not discharged if the lighting
conditions do not require flash for correction even when the flash is
popped up.
[Flash On] is used if the flash is popped up when the mode dial is at a
position other than B.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
3
Push down on the portion
indicated in the illustration to
retract the built-in flash.
Using Red-eye Reduction Flash
3
“Red-eye” is the phenomenon where eyes look reddish in
photographs taken in dark environments with a flash. This is caused
by the reflection of the electronic flash in the retina of the eye.
Red-eye occurs because pupils are dilated in dark environments.
This phenomenon cannot be averted but the following measures can
be used to combat it.
• Brighten the surroundings when shooting.
• Set to wide angle and move closer to the subject if a zoom lens
is in use.
• Use a flash that supports red-eye reduction.
• Position the flash as far away from the camera as possible when
using an external flash.
The red-eye reduction function on this camera reduces a red-eye
effect by discharging the flash twice. With the red-eye reduction
function, the pre-flash is discharged just before the shutter is
released. This reduces pupil dilation. The main flash is then
discharged while the pupils are smaller, reducing the red-eye effect.
To use the red-eye reduction function, select D in B mode, or F
or H in other modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
81
Daylight-Sync Shooting
In daylight conditions, the flash will eliminate shadows when a portrait
picture is taken with a shadow cast on a person’s face. Use of the
flash in this way is called Daylight-Sync shooting. [Flash On] is used
when shooting with Daylight-Sync shooting.
Taking pictures (in e mode)
1 Pop up the built-in flash manually and confirm that the flash
mode is set to E.
2 Confirm that the flash is fully charged.
3 Take a picture.
3
Without Daylight-Sync
With Daylight-Sync
The picture may be overexposed if the background is too bright.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
Compensating for Flash Output
You can change the flash output in a range of -2.0 to +1.0. The flash
compensation values are as follows for 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV.
Step Interval
1/3 EV
Flash Compensation Value
-2.0, -1.7, -1.3, -1.0, -0.7, -0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0
-2.0, -1.5, -1.0, -0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0
1/2 EV
3
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) in the
[Flash Mode] screen.
Flash Mode
Flash On
The flash compensation value is
displayed.
Press the | button to reset the flash
output compensation value to 0.0.
+0.3
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
• The flash output compensation cannot be set in B (Green) mode.
• N appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel during the flash exposure
• When the flash output exceeds its maximum amount, the compensation will
not be effective even if the compensation value is set to the plus (+) side.
• Compensating to the minus (-) side may not affect the image if the subject is
too close, the aperture value is small or the sensitivity is high.
• The flash output compensation is also effective for external flash units which
support P-TTL auto flash mode.
Enabling Shooting while Charging the Flash
You can set the camera to enable
20. Release While Charging
shooting while the flash is being
charged.
1
2
Off
On
[On] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu
taken while the built-in flash is charging.
Enables shutter release
while the built-in
flash is charging
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
83
Playing Back Pictures
Playing Back Images
You can play back captured images with the camera.
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to play back
details on the software.
3
1
Press the Q button.
The camera enters Playback mode and
the most recently captured image (image
with the highest file number) is displayed
on the monitor. (For movies, only the first
frame is displayed on the monitor.)
Press the M button during playback
to switch the information display such as
shooting information for the displayed
image.
Refer to p.29 for details about display
information.
2
Press the four-way controller
(45).
4 : Displays the previous image.
5 : Displays the next image.
You can also display the next or previous
image by turning the front e-dial (R).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
functions.
• When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still
remains in the buffer memory, you can additionally save the image in RAW
format by pressing the L button during playback.
If the image was shot using any of the following settings, the corresponding
RAW image listed is saved.
- Multi-exposure
- Extended Bracketing
- Digital Filter
RAW image with Multi-exposure
RAW image with standard settings
RAW image without filter effect
- HDR Capture
- Cross Processing
RAW image with standard exposure
RAW image without Cross Processing
3
Deleting a Single Image
You can delete images one by one.
• Deleted images cannot be restored.
1
Press the Q button and use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image to delete.
2
Press the i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
85
3
4
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Delete].
100-0105
Select a file format to delete for images
saved in RAW+ format.
Delete
Cancel
Deletes only the JPEG
Delete JPEG
image.
OK
OK
Deletes only the RAW
Delete RAW
image.
Deletes images in both
file formats.
3
Delete
RAW+JPEG
Press the 4 button.
The image is deleted.
When deleting multiple images at once, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
How to Operate the Shooting
Functions
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control
panel, [A Rec. Mode] menu or [A Custom Setting] menu.
Direct Keys Setting Items
Press the four-way controller (2345) in
Capture mode to set the following items.
4
Key
Item
Function
Page
Sets Continuous Shooting, Self-timer,
Remote Control, Exposure Bracketing
or Mirror Lock-up Shooting.
Drive Mode
2
Flash Mode
Sets the method of flash discharge.
3
4
Adjusts the color balance to match the
type of the light source illuminating the
subject.
White Balance
Sets the image finishing tone such as
color and contrast before shooting an
image.
Custom Image
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
89
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items
The following settings can be performed in
the [A Rec. Mode 1-5] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture mode to
display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.
Menu
Item
Function
Page
USER Mode
Sets the settings for A mode.
4
Sets the exposure mode when the mode
dial is set to A.
Exposure Mode
File Format
Sets the file format.
JPEG Recorded
Sets the recording size of images saved in
JPEG format.
Pixels
A1
Sets the quality of images saved in JPEG
format.
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point
Sets the number of AF points when the
focusing area is set to S (AUTO).
Setting
Corrects distortions and chromatic
aberrations occurring due to lens
properties.
Lens Correction
Changes the hues and contrast by
performing digital cross processing.
Cross Processing
Extended
Sets the Extended Bracketing shooting
settings.
Bracketing
Applies a digital filter effect when taking
pictures.
Digital Filter
Enables capturing images at high dynamic
range.
A2 HDR Capture
Creates a composite picture by taking
multiple frames.
Multi-exposure
Takes pictures at a set interval from a set
time.
Interval Shooting
Adjusts the composition of your image
using the Shake Reduction mechanism.
Composition Adjust.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Expands the dynamic range and prevents
bright and dark areas from occurring.
D-Range Setting
Sets the range of automatic correction in
AUTO.
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction
when shooting with a high ISO sensitivity.
A3
Slow Shutter Speed Sets whether to use Noise Reduction in
NR
slow speed shooting.
Program Line
Color Space
Selects Program Line.
Sets the color space to use.
Sets the file format of images saved in
RAW format.
RAW File Format
4
Movie
Sets the movie settings.
Live View
Sets the Live View settings.
Sets whether to display the electronic level
which detects whether the camera is level.
Electronic Level
Corrects the tilt (right and left) of the
image.
Horizon Correction
A4
Reduces vertical and horizontal camera
shake.
Shake Reduction
Sets the focal length when using a lens
obtained.
Instant Review
Digital Preview
Sets the Instant Review display settings.
Sets the Digital Preview settings.
Sets the functions assigned to the e-dials
in each exposure mode.
E-Dial Programming
Sets the functions for when the |/Y
button, = button, or Preview dial is
operated, or the shutter release button is
pressed halfway.
Button
Customization
A5
Determines which settings to save when
the power is turned off.
Memory
Saves the current camera settings as
A.
Save USER Mode
*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to
*2 Can also be set using the control panel.
A.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items
Set the [A Custom Setting 1-4] menus to fully use the functions of a SLR
camera.
Menu
Item
1. EV Steps
Function
Page
Sets the adjustment steps for ISO
sensitivity.
2. Sensitivity Steps
3. Expanded
Sensitivity
Expands the lower and upper sensitivity
limits.
4. Meter Operating
Time
Sets the exposure metering time.
4
A1
5. AE-L with AF
Locked
Sets whether to lock the exposure value
when the focus is locked.
Sets whether to link the exposure and
6. Link AE to AF Point AF point in the focusing area during
multi-segment metering.
Sets whether to compensate for
7. Auto EV
automatically when the proper exposure
Compensation
-
cannot be determined.
8. Auto Bracketing
Order
Sets the order for Auto Bracketing
shooting.
Sets whether to shoot all frames with
one release when using Exposure
Bracketing.
9. One-Push
Bracketing
Sets whether to automatically fine-tune
the white balance when specifying the
light source on the white balance
setting.
10. WB Adjustable
Range
A2
11. WB When Using
Flash
Sets the white balance setting when
using flash.
-
Sets whether to adjust the tungsten light
color tone when the white balance is set
to F (Auto White Balance).
12. AWB in Tungsten
Light
13. Color Temperature Sets the adjustment steps for color
Steps
temperature.
14. Superimpose AF
Area
Sets whether to display the active AF
point(s) in red in the viewfinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Sets the action priority for when the
focus mode is set to l and the
shutter release button is fully pressed.
15. AF.S Setting
Sets the action priority for Continuous
16. AF.C Setting
k.
Sets whether to use the AF assist light
17. AF Assist Light
when autofocusing in dark locations.
A3 18. AF with Remote
Sets whether to use autofocus when
Control
shooting with remote control.
Sets the remote control operation when
using the remote control in p (Bulb)
mode.
19. Remote Control in
Bulb
4
20. Release While
Charging
Sets whether to release shutter while
the built-in flash is charging.
21. Flash in Wireless Sets the built-in flash discharge method
Mode
in the wireless mode.
22. LCD Panel
Illumination
23. Saving Rotation
Info
Sets whether to save rotation
information when shooting.
Sets whether to save the last menu tab
24. Save Menu
Location
displayed on the monitor and to display
it again the next time the 3 button
is pressed.
When set to [On], if the focus mode is
set to l and a manual focus lens is
A4
attached, catch-in focus shooting is
enabled and the shutter is released
25. Catch-in Focus
automatically when the subject comes
into focus.
26. AF Fine
Adjustment
Adjusts the AF focusing position.
Sets whether to enable shutter release
position other than s.
27. Using Aperture
Ring
Reset Custom
Functions
Resets all the settings in the [A Custom
Setting 1-4] menus to the defaults.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
93
Setting the Exposure
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed
Correct exposure of the subject is determined by a combination of shutter
speed and aperture setting. There are many correct combinations of
shutter speed and aperture value for a particular subject. Different
combinations produce different effects.
Effect of Shutter Speed
By changing the shutter speed, you can manipulate how time is expressed
in the pictures you create. Unlike with your own naked eyes, in a picture
you can capture a fraction of a moment or a whole period of time, creating
different effects.
4
Use the b (Shutter Priority) mode.
Using slower shutter speed
If the subject is moving, the image will be
blurred because the shutter is open
longer.
It is possible to enhance the effect of
motion (rivers, waterfalls, waves, etc.) by
intentionally using a slower shutter speed.
Using faster shutter speed
Choosing a faster shutter speed will allow
freezing the action of a moving subject.
A faster shutter speed also helps to
prevent camera shake.
Effect of Aperture
By changing the aperture, you can control the depth of the area that
appears in focus in the picture (the depth of field). By either narrowing the
focus to emphasize a single point or giving depth to your picture instead
you can completely change the feel of the picture you create.
Use the c (Aperture Priority) mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
Opening the aperture (reduce the
aperture value)
Objects closer and farther than the
focused subject will be more out of focus.
For instance, if you take a picture of a
flower against a landscape with the
aperture open, the landscape in front and
behind the flower will be blurred,
emphasizing only the flower.
Closing the aperture (increase the
aperture value)
The range in focus expands forward and
backward. For instance, if you take a
picture of a flower against a landscape
with the aperture narrowed, the landscape
in front and behind the flower will be in
focus.
4
Aperture and Depth of Field
The following table summarizes how the aperture affects the depth of
field. The depth of field may also change depending on the lens used
and the distance to the subject.
Open
(Smaller value)
Close
(Larger value)
Aperture
Depth of field
Area of focus
Shallow
Narrow
Deep
Wide
Longer
(Telephoto)
Shorter
(Wide-angle)
Lens focal length
Distance to the
subject
Near
Far
• The depth of field for the X differs depending on the lens but
compared to a 35 mm camera, the value is roughly one aperture
setting lower (the focused range becomes narrower).
• The wider the wide-angle lens, and the farther away the subject,
the deeper the depth of field is (some zoom lenses do not have a
scale for depth of field because of their designs).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
95
Setting the Sensitivity
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.
The sensitivity can be set to [AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent
to ISO 100 to 12800. The default setting is [AUTO].
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) while
pressing the o button in
Capture mode.
The sensitivity displayed on the status
screen and LCD panel and in the
viewfinder changes.
4
Press the | button to set the sensitivity to
[AUTO].
AF.S
P
1/200
F
5.0
ISO
AUTO
200
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
ISO AUTO
16M
2
Take your finger off the o button and rear e-dial (S).
The sensitivity is set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
• The sensitivity can also be changed by pressing the o button once, taking
your finger off the button and turning the rear e-dial (S). In this case, the
sensitivity is fixed when the o button is pressed again or the exposure
•
•
•
When the exposure mode is set to
or (Movie), the sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO] and the setting cannot be changed.
When the exposure mode is set to (Sensitivity Priority), (Hyper-manual),
(Bulb) or (Flash X-sync Speed), the sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO].
When the exposure mode is set to (Bulb), the upper sensitivity limit is ISO 1600.
B
(Green),
L
(Shutter & Aperture Priority)
C
K
a
p
M
p
• The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 80 to 51200 when
[On]. However, the minimum sensitivity is ISO 160 when [Highlight
3] menu.
• Captured images may show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set. You can
4
•
You can select whether to set the sensitivity in increments of 1 EV or in
[2. Sensitivity Steps] of the [
A
Setting the Range of Automatic Sensitivity Correction
Set the range in which the sensitivity is automatically adjusted when the
sensitivity is set to [AUTO]. The sensitivity is automatically corrected in the
range of [ISO 100-3200] by default.
1
Select [ISO AUTO Setting] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [ISO AUTO Setting] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
ISO AUTO Setting
ISOAUTO
100
-
3200
(23) to set the minimum
AUTO ISO Parameters
sensitivity.
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
97
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to set the maximum
sensitivity.
ISO AUTO Setting
100
AUTO ISO Parameters
ISOAUTO
-
3200
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
4
5
Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AUTO ISO
Parameters] and press the four-way controller (5).
4
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the parameter and press
ISO AUTO Setting
ISOAUTO
100
-
3200
the 4 button.
AUTO ISO Parameters
Increases the sensitivity
as little as possible
Slow
u
s
a
Standard (default setting)
Actively increases the
sensitivity
MENU
Fast
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Expanding the Dynamic Range
Dynamic range is the ratio that indicates the light level expressed by the
CMOS sensor pixels from bright areas to dark areas. The larger it is, the
better the whole range from dark to bright areas will appear in the picture.
By expanding the dynamic range, you can expand the light level
expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels, making it more difficult for
bright areas to occur in the image.
To expand the dynamic range, make the settings in [D-Range
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
Reducing Image Noise (Noise Reduction)
When shooting with a digital camera, image noise (image roughness or
unevenness) becomes noticeable in the following situations.
- when shooting with a long exposure
- when shooting with a high sensitivity setting
- when the temperature of the CMOS sensor is high
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. However, images
shot with Noise Reduction will take longer to save.
High-ISO NR
4
Reduces noise at high sensitivity (ISO) settings.
1
Select [High-ISO NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [High-ISO NR] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Auto], [Off],
[Low], [Medium], [High] or
High-ISO NR
ISO
NRAUTO
Auto
OFF
Off
NR
ISO
ISO
Low
NR
ISO
Medium
NR
ISO
High
Custom
NR
ISO
[Custom].
NRCUSTOM
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Applies Noise Reduction at optimally calculated
levels throughout ISO range. (default setting)
Auto
Off
Does not apply Noise Reduction at any ISO setting.
Applies Noise Reduction at constant chosen level
throughout ISO range.
Low/Medium/High
Applies Noise Reduction at user-defined levels for
each ISO setting.
Custom
3
Press the 4 button.
If you select [Auto], [Off], [Low], [Medium], or [High], proceed to Step 7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
99
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Setting] and
press the four-way controller (5).
The screen to set the noise reduction level according to the sensitivity
appears.
Use the four-way controller (23
)
1
2
High-ISO NR
80
ISO
NR
to select a sensitivity value and use
the four-way controller (45) to set
the level of noise reduction which is
applied to the selected sensitivity.
OFF
ISO
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
OFF
OFF
OFF
ISO 100
ISO 200
ISO 400
ISO 800
ISO 1600
ISO 3200
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
ISO
NR
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
MENU
Reset
[High-ISO NR 2] screen.
4
Press the | button to reset the setting of
the selected sensitivity value.
Sensitivity Steps] settings made in the [
A
6
7
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Reduces noise during long exposures.
1
Select [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Auto], [On] or [Off], and
press the 4 button.
1
2
4
3
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
ISO
NR
AUTO
AUTO
ON
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
Color Space
NR
NR
NR
OFF
RAW File Format
PEF
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
Determines conditions such as shutter speed, sensitivity, and
internal temperature, and automatically applies Noise
Reduction as necessary. (default setting)
Auto
Applies Noise Reduction when the exposure time is longer than 1
second.
On
Off
Does not apply Noise Reduction.
3
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• Processing may take a while when shooting with Slow Shutter Speed NR set
to [On]. Pictures cannot be taken while an image is being processed.
• When the Noise Reduction function is activated, [nr] blinks on the LCD panel
and in the viewfinder where the aperture value is normally displayed, and a
countdown of processing time is displayed where the shutter speed is
normally displayed.
4
Changing the Exposure Mode
This camera features the following nine exposure modes. Use the mode
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.
(z: Available ×: Not available)
EV
Change Change Change
Exposure
Mode
Compen- Shutter Aperture Sensi-
Characteristics
Page
sation
Speed
Value
tivity
B
Green
Lets you capture images
with fully automatic settings.
×
×
×
×
Automatically sets the
shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper
exposure according to
Program Line when taking
e
Hyper-
z
z
z
z
program pictures. You can use the
front and rear e-dials to
switch between shutter
priority and aperture priority.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101
EV
Change Change Change
Exposure
Mode
Compen- Shutter Aperture Sensi-
Characteristics
Page
sation
Speed
Value
tivity
Automatically sets the
K
shutter speed andaperture
Other
Sensitivity value to obtain a proper
z
×
×
than p.105
AUTO
Priority
exposure according to the
set sensitivity.
Lets you set the desired
shutter speed for
expressing moving
subjects.
b
Shutter
Priority
z
z
z
×
z
z
Lets you set the desired
aperture value for
controlling the depth of
field.
c
Aperture
Priority
×
z
4
Automatically sets the
sensitivity to obtain a
proper exposure with the
set shutter speed and
L
Shutter
&
×
z
z
z
AUTO p.110
only
Aperture aperture value according
Priority
to the brightness of the
subject.
Lets you set the shutter
speed and aperture value
to capture the picture with
creative intent.
a
Hyper-
manual
–
×
z
z
z
z
Other
than
AUTO
(up to
ISO
Lets you capture images
that require slow shutter
speeds such as fireworks
and night scenes.
p
Bulb
×
1600)
The shutter speed is
locked at 1/180 second.
Use this when using an
external flash that does
not automatically set the
sync speed.
M
Other
than p.116
AUTO
Flash
X-sync
Speed
–
×
z
For each exposure mode, you can set the functions for when the front/rear e-
dial or the | button is operated. Set in [E-Dial Programming] of the [A Rec.
dials and the | button by viewing the guides which appear on the monitor
when the camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned. (p.24)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Program Line
In [Program Line] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu, you can choose from
the following Program Lines. When [eLINE] is selected for the |
regulated according to the set Program Line.
Setting
j Auto
Characteristics
Camera determines the appropriate settings.
Basic Program Automatic Exposure (default
setting)
k Normal
Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes high
shutter speeds.
l Hi-speed Priority
4
Program Automatic Exposure that closes the
aperture as much as possible for a deep depth of
field.
DOF Priority
m
(deep)
Program Automatic Exposure that opens the
aperture as much as possible for a shallow depth
of field.
DOF Priority
n
(shallow)
Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes the
best aperture settings for the attached lens when
a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J or FA lens is used.
o MTF Priority
Using a Lens with an Aperture Ring
When using a lens with an aperture
ring, set the aperture to the s (AUTO)
position while holding down the auto-
lock button on the lens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
103
Using the B (Green) Mode
Lets you capture images with fully automatic settings.
In B mode, pictures are taken with the following settings.
• Program Line
• File Format
• Sensitivity
j (AUTO)
JPEG
AUTO
• Metering Method
• AF Point
L (Multi-segment Metering)
S (Auto)
• AUTO AF Point Setting 11 AF Points
• White Balance
• Custom Image
• High-ISO NR
F (Auto)
Bright
Auto
4
• Slow Shutter Speed NR Auto
• Shake Reduction
• Color Space
k (On)
sRGB
If the 3 button is pressed in 9 mode, the menu for Green Mode appears.
You cannot select items that cannot be changed.
1
Set the mode dial to B.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
• In B mode, the following functions are not available.
• Changing the shutter speed
• Changing the aperture value
• EV Compensation
• Interval Shooting
• Extended Bracketing
• Digital Filter
• Flash (Flash On, Slow-speed
Sync, Exposure Compensation)
• Continuous Shooting
• Focus Mode k (l is
selected)
• HDR Capture
• Cross Processing
• Horizon Correction
• Saving as A mode
• L and |/Y button
operations
• D-Range Setting
• Lens Correction
• Button Customization (default
settings are used)
• Exposure Bracketing
• Mirror Lock-up shooting
• Multi-exposure
• Custom menu settings (default
settings are used)
4
• The control panel cannot be displayed in B mode.
Using the e (Hyper-program) Mode
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper
exposure according to Program Line when taking pictures.
You can also use the front and rear e-dials to change the shutter speed
and aperture value while maintaining the proper exposure. (p.282)
1
Set the mode dial to e.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
105
2
Confirm the shutter speed and aperture value.
Confirm the settings using the status screen, viewfinder or LCD panel.
AF.S
P
1/125
F
5.6
ISO
AUTO
100
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
[
]
37
16M
• Set the Program Line to use in [Program Line] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.
4
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
Using the K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.
The shutter speed and aperture value are automatically set according to
the selected sensitivity to obtain a proper exposure.
1
Set the mode dial to K.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
adjust the sensitivity.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
AF.S
Sv
1/30
ISO 100
F
4.5
4
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
[
]
37
16M
• You can set the sensitivity to a value equivalent to ISO 100 to 12800. [AUTO]
is not available.
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
•
The sensitivity can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure
A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
107
Using the b (Shutter Priority) Mode
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.
When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the
shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed
to have the subject show movement.
The aperture value is automatically set to give a proper exposure
depending on the shutter speed.
1
Set the mode dial to b.
4
2
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the
range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
AF.S
Tv
1/125
F
5.6
ISO
AUTO
400
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
[
]
37
16M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
• The shutter speed can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the aperture value will blink on the
status screen and LCD panel and in
the viewfinder. If the subject is too bright, choose a faster shutter
speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter speed. When the
aperture value indication stops blinking, you can take a picture with
proper exposure.
4
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
109
Using the c (Aperture Priority) Mode
Set the aperture value for controlling the depth of field. The depth of field
is deeper and the front and back of the focused object is clear when the
aperture is set to a large value, small lens opening. The depth of field is
shallower and the front and back of the focused object is blurred when the
aperture is set to a small value, large lens opening.
The shutter speed is automatically set to the proper exposure depending
on the aperture value.
1
Set the mode dial to c.
4
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
adjust the aperture value.
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
AF.S
Av
1/30
F
4.5
ISO
AUTO
400
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
[
]
37
16M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected aperture value
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the shutter speed will blink on the status
screen and LCD panel and in the
viewfinder. When the subject is too bright, set the aperture to a
smaller lens opening (larger number), and when too dark, set the
aperture to a larger lens opening (smaller number). Once blinking
stops, you can take a picture with proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
4
Using the L (Shutter & Aperture Priority) Mode
You can set both the desired shutter speed and aperture to take the
picture.
Automatically sets the sensitivity so that the manually set shutter speed
and aperture value will give the proper exposure according to the
brightness of the subject.
1
Set the mode dial to L.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
2
3
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the
range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
adjust the aperture value.
4
The set values are displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
AF.S
TAv
1/1000
F
4.5
ISO
AUTO
100
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
[
]
37
16M
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV
• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or
menu. (p.120)
• In L mode, the sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the sensitivity will blink on the status
screen and LCD panel and in the
viewfinder. In such situations, change the shutter speed and
aperture. When the indication stops blinking, you can take a picture
with proper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.
Using the a (Hyper-manual) Mode
4
You can set the shutter speed and aperture value. This mode is suitable
to take pictures of your choice by combining them. This mode is
convenient for taking pictures using the same combination of the shutter
speed and aperture settings or taking intentionally underexposed (darker)
or overexposed (brighter) photographs.
1
Set the mode dial to a.
2
Press the | button.
The shutter speed and aperture value are
automatically switched to obtain a proper
exposure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
3
4
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
adjust the shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within the
range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
adjust the aperture value.
4
The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder and on the LCD
panel.
AF.S
M
1/125
ISO 100
F
5.6
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
[
]
37
16M
While adjusting the shutter speed or
aperture value, the difference from the
proper exposure (EV value) is displayed
in a bar graph. The proper exposure is set
when V is in the middle of the EV bar. If it
is towards -, it is underexposed. If it is
towards +, it is overexposed. If the value
exceeds the range of the EV bar (±5.0), or
Difference from the
proper exposure
if the subject is too bright or too dark, the “+” or “-” blinks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
• The sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO] in a mode. When the sensitivity is
set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is changed to a mode, the sensitivity
is also changed to the lowest value set in “Setting the Range of Automatic
• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or
menu. (p.120)
• Since the bar graphs in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel display the amount of
camera tilt to the left or right, the
difference from the proper exposure is
displayed as a number when [Electronic Level] is set to O (On).
Combining with L
4
a mode, if the shutter speed or aperture value is changed, the
combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes while the
exposure value is retained.
Example:If the shutter speed is 1/125 sec. and aperture is F5.6 and
these settings are locked with the L button, the
aperture automatically changes to F11 if the shutter speed
is changed to 1/30 sec. with the front e-dial (R).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
115
Using the p (Bulb) Mode
This setting is useful when shooting night scenes and fireworks which
require long exposures.
1
Set the mode dial to p.
4
AF.S
B
Bulb
ISO 100
F
5.6
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
[
]
37
16M
2
Press the shutter release button.
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept
pressed.
The following functions are not available in p mode.
- EV Compensation
- Exposure Bracketing
- Continuous Shooting
- Interval Shooting
- HDR Capture
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when the exposure
mode is set to p mode.
•
Use a sturdy tripod and the cable switch CS-205 (optional) or Remote Control
(optional) to prevent camera shake when using
p
mode. Connect the cable
• When using the remote control, set whether to start exposure with a press
and stop it with another press of the shutter release button on the remote
control, or to keep the shutter open as long as the release button on the
• The sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO] in p mode. When the sensitivity is
set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is changed to p mode, the sensitivity
is also changed to the lowest value set in “Setting the Range of Automatic
4
• When the exposure mode is set to p, the upper sensitivity limit is ISO 1600.
• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, we
recommend the use of the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when shooting
with a long exposure setting as the battery is being drained while the shutter
remains open. (p.53)
Using the M (Flash X-Sync Speed) Mode
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 second. Use this when using an
external flash that does not automatically set the sync speed.
1
Set the mode dial to M.
AF.S
X
1/180
ISO 100
F
5.6
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
[
]
37
16M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
117
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) to adjust the aperture value.
• Press the | button to retain the shutter speed at 1/180 second and
automatically adjust the aperture value.
• The sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO] in M mode. When the sensitivity is
set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is changed to M mode, the sensitivity
is also changed to the lowest value set in “Setting the Range of Automatic
Selecting the Metering Method
Choose the part of the viewfinder to use for measuring brightness and
determining exposure. The following three methods are available. The
factory default setting is L (Multi-segment metering).
4
1
Turn the metering mode
switching lever.
The set metering method is displayed in
the status screen and viewfinder.
L Multi-segmented Metering
The scene in the viewfinder is metered in 77
different zones. Even in backlit locations,
this mode automatically determines what
level of brightness is in which portion and
automatically adjusts exposure.
Center-weighted metering mode is automatically set even if you select multi-
segment metering mode when using a lens other than a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J,
FA, F or A lens, or when the lens aperture ring is set to a position other than s
Setting 4] menu is set to [Permitted].)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
Linking AE to AF Point during Multi-segment
Metering
you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area during
multi-segment metering.
Off Exposure is set separately from the AF point. (default setting)
On Exposure is set in accordance with the AF point.
1
2
MCenter-weighted Metering
Metering is weighted at the center of the
viewfinder. Use this metering when you want
to compensate for the exposure by
4
experience, instead of leaving it to the
camera. The illustration shows that
sensitivity increases as the pattern height
increases (center). This mode does not
automatically compensate for backlit scenes.
NSpot Metering
The brightness is measured only within a
limited area at the center of the viewfinder.
You can use this in combination with the AE
small and the correct exposure is difficult to
obtain.
Setting the Meter Operating Time
You can set the exposure metering time to [10 sec.] (default setting),
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
119
Adjusting Exposure
This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or underexpose
(darken) your picture.
The exposure steps can be selected from 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV Steps]
of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. You can adjust the EV compensation
value from -5 to +5 (EV).
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) while
pressing the m button.
The exposure is adjusted.
4
m is displayed in the status screen and viewfinder and on the LCD panel
during adjustment.
AF.S
P
1/100
ISO 100
F
5.6
Compensation value
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
11
AWB
JPEG
0EV
16M
Press the m button to check the compensation value after adjustment.
Press the | button to reset the EV compensation value to 0.0.
EV compensation is not available when the exposure mode is set to
B (Green) or p (Bulb) mode.
• The compensation value can also be changed by pressing the m button
once, taking your finger off the button and turning the rear e-dial (S). In
this case, EV compensation is set when the m button is pressed again or the
• The compensation value is not canceled by turning the camera off or by
switching to another exposure mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
EV Compensation for a and M modes
For example, if the EV compensation value is set to +1.5 for a
(Hyper-manual) and M (Flash X-sync speed) modes, an
underexposure of 1.5 EV is displayed on the EV bar. If you set the
exposure value so that the V is displayed at the center of the EV bar,
the image will be captured with the compensated value.
Changing the Exposure Steps
4
Set the exposure compensation steps to
1. EV Steps
increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV
1
2
1/3 EV Steps
1/2 EV Steps
p.91).
(
Exposure compensation steps
now set to 1/3 EV
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Step Interval
Exposure Setting Value
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0, ±3.3, ±3.7,
±4.0, ±4.3, ±4.7, ±5.0
1/3 EV
1/2 EV
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0, ±3.5, ±4.0, ±4.5, ±5.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
121
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)
AE Lock is a function that locks the exposure prior to taking a picture. Use
this when the subject is too small or is backlit and a proper exposure
setting cannot be obtained.
1
Set the exposure and press the
L button.
The camera locks the exposure
(brightness) at that instant.
@ is displayed in the status screen and
viewfinder while the AE Lock is engaged.
4
• The exposure remains locked as long as the L button is kept pressed or
the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure remains
taking your finger off the L button.
• You will hear a beep when the L button is pressed. The beep can be
•
AE Lock is not available in
B
(Green),
p
(Bulb) or
M
(Flash X-sync Speed) mode.
• When any of the following operations are performed, AE Lock is canceled.
- the L button is pressed again
- the Q button, 3 button or M button is pressed
- the mode dial is turned
- the lens is changed
- a lens with an s (Auto) position is set to a position other than the s position
• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on
the zooming position even while the AE Lock is engaged when using a zoom
lens whose maximum aperture value varies depending on the focal length.
However, the exposure value does not change and a picture is taken at a
brightness level set when the AE Lock is activated.
• The exposure can also be locked when the focus is locked. Set in [5. AE-L
Changing the Exposure Automatically when Shooting
Auto Bracketing is a function for continuously shooting images with
the exposure automatically adjusted for underexposure and
overexposure. Each time the shutter release button is pressed, 2, 3
or 5 shots are taken. Refer to “Shooting while Adjusting the Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Focusing
You can focus with the following methods.
The camera automatically focuses on the subject when the
shutter release button is pressed halfway.
Autofocus
=
Manual focus
Manually adjust the focus.
\
Using the Autofocus
You can also choose the autofocus mode from l (Single mode) where
the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject and
the focus is locked at that position, and k (Continuous mode) where
the subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter
release button is pressed halfway. The factory default setting is l.
4
1
Turn the focus mode lever to l
or A.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
123
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway and the
subject comes into focus, the focus is locked (focus lock) at
that position. To focus on another subject, take your finger off
the shutter release button first, then press the shutter release
button halfway again.
• Set the action priority for when the shutter release button is
l
Single
mode
The shutter cannot be released until the
subject is in focus. (default setting)
Focus-
priority
If the subject is too close to the camera,
move back and take the picture. If the
1
4
Release-
priority
The shutter can be released even if the
subject is not in focus.
2
The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the
shutter release button is pressed halfway. The focus indicator
] appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. Even if the subject is not in focus, the shutter can be
released when the shutter release button is pressed fully.
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus,
the camera automatically tracks the subject if it is determined
to be a moving object. The lens will automatically operate and
continuously focus on the subject.
k
Continuous
mode
Takes pictures giving priority to keeping
Focus-priority
FPS-priority
the subject in focus during Continuous
Shooting. (default setting)
1
2
Takes pictures giving priority to the
shooting speed during Continuous
Shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
2
Look through the viewfinder and
press the shutter release button
halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is
not in focus.)
4
Focus indicator
AF Assist Light
You can set whether or not to use the AF assist light during
l
mode
A
To make focusing easier when the subject is in a dark location,
On the AF assist light turns on when the shutter release button is
pressed halfway. (default setting)
1
2
Off The AF assist light will not be used.
Using the = Button to Focus on the Subject
You can set the camera so that focusing is performed when the = button
is pressed.
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AF Button]
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [AF Button] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
125
3
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Enable AF].
AF Button
Enable AF
Cancel AF
AF is performed when
the AF button is pressed
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Autofocus is performed by using the = button or the
shutter release button. (default setting)
Enable AF
Cancel AF
\ appears in the viewfinder while the = button is
pressed. Autofocus is not performed when the shutter
release button is pressed. (Take your finger off the =
4
button to return to normal autofocus mode.)
4
5
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
6
Press the = button while
looking through the viewfinder.
Autofocus is performed.
When the = button is pressed and the subject comes
into focus, the Focus Lock function is activated while
the button is pressed.
l
Single mode
k
The subject is kept in focus while the = button is
Continuous mode pressed.
7
Press the shutter release button.
When [Enable AF] is assigned to [Shutter Button Half Press] in [Button
Customization], press the shutter release button while holding down the
= button.
The picture is taken.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
AF Fine Adjustment
You can adjust the AF focusing position.
• Be sure to use [AF Fine Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should
be taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture
images with the appropriate focus.
•
Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain the
accurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test shots.
1
4] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
4
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [On] and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [26. AF Fine Adjustment] screen appears.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Apply All] or
[Apply One].
Apply All
Applies the same adjustment value to all lenses.
This item will appear on the display only when the lens ID is
Apply One obtained. Saves and applies a different adjustment value for
each lens type. (Up to 20 lens types)
Reset
Resets the saved adjustment value.
Press the four-way controller (5)
and adjust the value with the rear
e-dial (S) or the four-way
controller (45).
26. AF Fine Adjustment
Apply All
+5
Apply One
Unset
Reset
OK
MENU
0
Cancel
OK
Available operations
Four-way controller (5)/
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y)
Adjusts the focus to a closer position.
Adjusts the focus to a farther position.
Resets the adjustment value to ±0.
Four-way controller (4)/
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)
| button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
127
5
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The adjustment value is saved.
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera returns to Capture mode.
Take a test picture.
You can easily check the focusing point by enlarging the image during
Even when an adjustment value has been saved using [Apply One], if you
press the 4 button with [Apply All] selected in Step 3, the [Apply All] value is
used instead of the [Apply One] value.
4
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)
Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to. The factory default
setting is S (Auto).
Selected AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area).
Center
Select
Sets the focusing area to the center of the viewfinder.
U
Sets the focusing area to the user selected point from eleven
points in the AF frame.
j
The camera selects the optimum AF point even if the subject
is not centered. You can select from 11 AF points (default
setting) or 5 points in [AUTO AF Point Setting] in the [A Rec.
Mode 1] menu.
Auto
S
1
Turn the AF point switching dial.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
• AF point(s) are not illuminated red in the viewfinder when [Off] is selected for
• The focusing area is fixed to U regardless of this setting when using lenses
Setting the Focus Position in the Viewfinder
1
Set the AF point switching dial to
j.
V appears in the viewfinder and the AF
point can be changed.
4
2
3
Look through the viewfinder and check the position of the
subject.
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to change the AF
point.
The selected AF point appears in the
status screen.
AF.S
P
1/2000
F
2.8
0.0
0 0
ISO
AUTO 1600
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
AWB
[
]
JPEG 16M
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
129
Available operations
4 button
Returns the AF point to the center of the AF
frame.
Press and hold 4 button Disables changing the AF point and enables
direct key operation of the four-way controller
(2345). To enable changing the AF point,
press the 4 button while direct key
operation is enabled. You will hear a beep
when switching between enabled and
disabled.
The AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder
(Superimpose AF Area) and you can
check where you set the AF point.
4
• The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the camera is turned
off or the focusing area is switched to U or S.
• V appears in the viewfinder when the AF point can be changed.
• When any of the following operations are performed, changing of the AF
point (in Step 3) is canceled.
- the main switch is turned off
- the mode dial is turned
- the AF point switching dial is turned
- the Q button, 3 button, M button or U button is pressed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
Locking the Focus (Focus Lock)
If the subject is outside the range of the focusing area, the camera cannot
automatically focus on the subject. In this case, focus the camera on the
subject in the focusing area, lock the focus at that position (Focus Lock),
and then recompose your picture.
1
Set the focus mode lever to l.
2
Frame the desired composition
for your picture in the viewfinder.
4
Example) The person is out of
focus and the background
is focused instead.
3
4
Center the subject to focus in the
viewfinder and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is
not in focus.)
Lock the focus.
Keep the shutter release button pressed halfway. The focus will remain
locked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
131
5
Recompose the picture while
keeping the shutter release
button pressed halfway.
• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ] is displayed.
• Turning the zoom ring with the focus locked may cause the subject to be out
of focus.
4
Locking Exposure when the Focus is Locked
Set [5. AE-L with AF Locked] in the
5. AE-L with AF Locked
lock the exposure value while the focus
1
2
Off
On
is locked.
AE is locked
when the focus
is locked
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Off Exposure is not locked when the focus is locked. (default setting)
On Exposure is locked when the focus is locked.
1
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)
When you adjust the focus manually, you can use either the focus
indicator or the matte field in the viewfinder.
Using the Focus Indicator
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in
focus even during manual focus.
You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ].
1
Set the focus mode lever to \.
4
2
Look through the viewfinder,
press the shutter release button
halfway and turn the focusing
ring.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
133
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus.
Focus indicator
• Adjust the focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when the
4
Using the Viewfinder Matte Field
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.
1
Set the focus mode lever to
\.
2
Look through the viewfinder and
turn the focusing ring until the
subject is clearly visible in the
viewfinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode
is set to [On], if the focus mode is set to l and one of the following
types of lenses is attached, catch-in focus shooting is enabled and
the shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into
focus.
• Manual focus lens
• DA or FA lens that has a = and \ setting on the lens (the
setting on the lens must be set to \ before shooting)
How to Take Pictures
1 Attach a proper lens to the camera.
2 Set the focus mode lever to l.
4
3 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.
4 Press the shutter release button fully.
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes
into focus at the set position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
135
Checking the Composition, Exposure
and Focus Before Shooting (Preview)
You can use the preview function to check depth of field, composition,
exposure and focus before taking a picture.
There are two preview methods.
Preview Method
Optical Preview
Description
For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.
|
For checking the composition, exposure and
focus on the monitor.
Digital Preview
e
You can also use the Live View function to display a real-time image on the
monitor and change the shooting function settings during display and check the
4
Selecting the Preview Method
Choose whether to use Optical Preview or Digital Preview when the main
switch is turned to the preview position (|).
The default setting is Optical Preview.
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Preview Dial]
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Preview Dial] screen appears.
Press the four-way controller (5)
Preview Dial
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Optical Preview]
Optical Preview
Digital Preview
or [Digital Preview].
For checking depth of
field with viewfinder
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
4
5
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• While shooting with Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure or Live View, Optical
Preview is used regardless of the setting.
• Digital Preview can also be assigned to the |/Y button. If Optical
Preview is assigned to the Preview dial and Digital Preview is assigned to the
for assigning a function to the |/Y button.
4
Setting the Display for Digital Preview
For Digital Preview, you can set whether to display the histogram and
Bright/Dark Area warning, and whether to enable enlarging images.
1
Select [Digital Preview] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Digital Preview] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Histogram],
[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge
Digital Preview
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review
Instant Review].
MENU
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Press the 3 button twice.
3
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
Displaying the Optical Preview
1
Position the subject inside the AF
frame and press the shutter
release button halfway to focus
on the subject.
2
Turn the main switch to | while
looking through the viewfinder.
4
You can check the depth of field in the
viewfinder while the main switch is set to
the position |.
During this time, no shooting information
is displayed in the viewfinder, and the
shutter cannot be released.
3
Take your finger off the main switch.
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
Displaying the Digital Preview
1
Focus on the subject, then
compose the picture in the
viewfinder and turn the main
switch to |.
When Digital Preview is assigned to the
|/Y button, press the |/Y
button.
4
The icon (|) appears on the monitor
during preview and you can check the
composition, exposure and focus.
AE.L
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)
L button
Saves the preview image. Select [Save as]
and press the 4 button.
2
Press the shutter release button halfway.
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
139
Using the Shake Reduction Function
to Prevent Camera Shake
Using the Shake Reduction Function
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when
the shutter release button is pressed. This is useful for taking pictures in
situations where camera shake is likely to occur. The Shake Reduction
function allows you to take pictures at approximately 4 steps slower
shutter speed without a risk of the camera shake.
The Shake Reduction function is ideal when taking pictures in the following
situations.
4
• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,
on cloudy days and in the shade
• When taking telephoto pictures
Picture taken with the Shake
Blurred picture
Reduction function
The Shake Reduction function can be used to reduce horizontal and
vertical camera shake or keep the image level.
• The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused by
subject movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter
speed.
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake
Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a very
slow shutter speed, for example when panning or shooting night scenes. In
this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake Reduction function and use
the camera with a tripod.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake
1
Select [Shake Reduction] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select k or l and press
the 4 button.
1
2
3
4 5
Movie
Live View
Electronic Level
Horizon Correction
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
Uses Shake Reduction. (default
setting)
k
OK
OK
MENU
l Does not use Shake Reduction.
Cancel
4
3
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Aim the camera at the subject and press the shutter
release button halfway.
k appears in the viewfinder and the
Shake Reduction function is activated.
Correcting the Tilt of the Images
When an image is tilted, it can be corrected up to a maximum of ±2
degrees.
1
Select [Horizon Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select O or P.
1
2
3
4 5
Movie
Live View
Electronic Level
Horizon Correction
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
35mm
MENU
Exit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
141
3
4
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Aim the camera at the subject and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The following indicators appear on the status screen.
q Shake Reduction On + Horizon Correction On
r
Shake Reduction Off + Horizon Correction On
• Set [Shake Reduction] to l (Off) when using the camera with a tripod or
when this function is not needed.
4
• The Shake Reduction function automatically turns off in the following
situations. Note that the Shake Reduction function cannot be selected when
the following functions are set.
- p (Bulb) mode
- Self-timer shooting
- Remote Control shooting
- Mirror Lock-up shooting
- when [Auto Align] is set to P (Off) in the [HDR Capture] setting
- when using the flash in wireless mode
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) right
after turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the
Shake Reduction function to become stable, and then press the shutter
button gently. If k appears in the viewfinder when you press the shutter
release button halfway, the camera is ready to take a picture.
• The Shake Reduction function is available with any X compatible
PENTAX lens. However, when the aperture ring is set to a position other than
the s (Auto) position for a lens with a s position or a lens without an s
position is used, the camera will not operate unless [27. Using Aperture Ring]
is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu. Set this beforehand.
In such cases, however, some functions will be restricted. Refer to “Notes on
[27. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.339) for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens information
such as focal length.
If the camera uses a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lens information
is automatically obtained when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
If you use a lens whose information such as focal length cannot be
appears when the camera is turned on with the Shake Reduction function
set to k (On).
Set the focal length manually in the [Input Focal Length] setting screen.
• The [Input Focal Length] setting screen does not appear when using a lens
whose information such as focal length can be automatically obtained.
• When using a lens without the s position on the aperture or with the aperture
4
• The effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well
as focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not work as
effectively as expected when shooting at close ranges.
1
Use the four-way controller
(45) or the rear e-dial (S) to
set the focal length.
Input Focal Length
100
135
120
Select from the following 34 focal length
values. (The default setting is 35 mm.)
8
10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120
135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
550 600 700 800
• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting
being used in the same manner.
2
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
143
Shooting with Self-timer
This camera has the following two types of self-timers.
Self-timer
(12 sec.)
Shutter is released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode
to include the photographer in the picture.
g
A mirror pops up immediately after the shutter release
button is pressed. The shutter is released after about 2
seconds. Use this mode to avoid camera shake when the
shutter release button is pressed.
Self-timer
(2 sec.)
Z
4
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
Press the four-way controller (3)
Drive Mode
and use the four-way controller
Self-timer (12 sec.)
(45) to select g or Z.
MUP
2
s
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
6
7
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
Press the shutter release button
fully.
For g, the front and back self-timer lamps
start blinking slowly and blink rapidly 2
seconds before the shutter is released.
The beep is heard and the rate increases.
The shutter will be released about 12
seconds after the shutter release button
is pressed fully.
4
For Z, the shutter will be released about
2 seconds after the shutter release button
is pressed fully.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
145
• Select a mode other than g or Z in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
Self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if
menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when g or Z is set.
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock
the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure mode is set
to a (Manual).
4
Removing the Eyecup FR
Attaching the ME Viewfinder cap
Shooting with Remote Control (Optional)
The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remote
You can select from the following three settings for Remote Control
shooting.
The shutter is released immediately after the shutter
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
Remote Control
h
i
RemoteControl The shutter is released about 3 seconds after the shutter
(3s delay)
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
Continuous shooting starts when the shutter release
button on the remote control unit is pressed. Press the
shutter release button on the remote control unit again to
exit continuous shooting.
Remote
Continuous
Shooting
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.
4
Press the four-way controller (3)
Drive Mode
Remote Control
and use the four-way controller
MUP
(45) to select h, i, or i.
W appears on the LCD panel. The self-
timer lamp will blink and the camera is in
a stand-by status.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
147
7
Point the remote control unit
towards the remote control
receiver on the front or back of
the camera and press the shutter
release button on the remote
control.
Approx.
4 m
The operating distance of the remote
control unit is approximately 4 m from the
front of the camera and approximately 2
m from the back of the camera.
Approx.
2 m
After a picture is taken, the self-timer
lamp lights for 2 seconds and then returns
to blinking.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
• By default, you cannot adjust the focus with the remote control unit. Focus on
the subject first with the camera before operating with the remote control.
cannot be used with the remote control unit during Live View.)
• When using the Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1, AF can be operated with
the S button. The { button cannot be used.
• Select a mode other than h, i or i in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel
the Remote Control shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is
Mode 5] menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when h, i or i
is set.
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lock
the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure mode is set
to a (Manual).
4
Removing the Eyecup FR
Attaching the
ME Viewfinder cap
• The remote control may not operate in backlit conditions.
• The Remote Control F can send a remote control signal about 30,000 times.
Contact a PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this will involve a
fee).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
149
Shooting with the Mirror Lock-up Function
Use the Mirror Lock-up function if camera shake is evident even when the
remote control or cable switch is used with a tripod.
For Mirror Lock-up Shooting, press the shutter release button to raise the
mirror up and press it again to release the shutter.
The following two types of Mirror Lock-up shooting are available.
Mirror Up
Mirror Lock-up shooting with the shutter release button.
d
e
Mirror Lock-up shooting with the remote control. The
shutter will be released immediately after the shutter
Mirror Up
Remote Control release button on the remote control unit is pressed
(p.145).
4
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select d.
Press the four-way controller (3)
Drive Mode
Mirror Lock-up Shooting
and use the four-way controller
MUP
(45) to select d or e.
MUP
d appears in the status screen and on
the LCD panel.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
7
Press the shutter release button fully.
The mirror pops up and you will hear a beep. The AE Lock function is
enabled with the exposure value set immediately before the mirror pops
up.
4
8
Press the shutter release button fully again.
The shutter is released and the picture is taken.
• Select a mode other than d or e in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel
Mirror Lock-up shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned
5] menu.
• The mirror automatically returns to its original position if 1 minute elapses
after the mirror pops up when the shutter release button is pressed for the
first time (except while using Multi-exposure).
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when d or e
is set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
151
Taking Pictures Continuously
Continuous Shooting
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is kept
pressed.
The following two types of Continuous Shooting are available.
Continuous
For JPEG image with p/C, up to approx. 30 frames
g
h
Shooting (Hi) are taken continuously at a maximum of approx. 7.0 fps.
For JPEG image with p/C, pictures are taken
continuously at a maximum of approx. 1.6 fps until the SD
Memory Card is full.
Continuous
Shooting (Lo)
4
When the file format is [RAW] (PEF), up to approx. 8 frames for g and up to
approx. 10 frames for h can be taken continuously.
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
Press the four-way controller (3)
Drive Mode
Continuous Shooting (Hi)
and use the four-way controller
MUP
(45) to select g or h.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
5
6
Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.
Press the shutter release button fully.
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully
pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.
• If the focus mode is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is locked in
the first frame and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.
• Focusing is continuously activated during Continuous Shooting when the focus
mode is set to k (Continuous mode).
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the
built-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release before the
4
• Select a mode other than g or h in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
Continuous Shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off
menu.
On.
Interval Shooting
During Interval Shooting, pictures are taken at a set interval from a set
time.
• Interval Shooting is not available in the following situations.
- when the exposure mode is set to A, B (Green), p (Bulb), or C
(Movie)
- when Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set
• When Interval Shooting is set, Multi-exposure is not available.
1
Select [Interval Shooting] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
153
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Interval].
Interval Shooting
Start Shooting
:
Interval
00 00 ' 00"
002images
Now
When taking two or more pictures, set the
wait time until the next picture is taken.
Number of Shots
Start Interval
Start Time
Use the four-way controller (45) to
select the number of hours, minutes, and
seconds, and use the four-way controller
(23) to set the time.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
You can set up to 24 hours, 00 minutes, and 00 seconds.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of
Shots].
4
Set the number of shots to be taken.
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)
to select the number of shots to be taken.
You can select between 1 and 999 shots.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval].
Set the time when the first picture is taken.
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Now] or [Set Time].
Shooting starts immediately. You can take two or more
pictures.
Now
Shooting starts at the set time. Press the four-way controller
(3) to select [Start Time], use the four-way controller (45) to
select the time, and use the four-way controller (23) to set
Set Time
the start time.
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
6
7
Press the shutter release button
halfway.
Press the shutter release
button to start interval
shooting
The focus indicator ] appears when
focused.
Press the shutter release button fully.
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set
to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in
Step 2.
4
After the set number of pictures is taken, the camera returns to normal
Capture mode.
• The camera cannot be operated during Interval Shooting. To cancel the
Interval Shooting, press any button on the back of the camera or press the
shutter release button and the 3 button to display the exit confirmation
screen, and then use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exit] and press
the 4 button. You can also exit the Interval Shooting by turning the main
switch off or turning the mode dial.
• [Single Frame Shooting] is selected regardless of the current drive mode
setting.
• If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to l (Single mode)
or if the [Interval] setting is too short and the previous image processing
cannot be completed before taking the next picture, no picture may be taken.
• Although each shot taken is displayed on the monitor with Instant Review,
they cannot be enlarged or deleted.
• The [Interval] setting is disabled when [Number of Shots] is set to [1].
• Interval Shooting is canceled when the SD Memory Card has no more
available space.
Shooting, the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time
approaches.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using
the Interval Shooting over a long period of time. (p.53)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
155
Multi-exposure
You can create a composite picture by taking multiple frames.
• Multi-exposure is not available in the following situations.
- when the exposure mode is set to B (Green) or C (Movie)
- when Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is set
• When Multi-exposure is set, the following functions are not available.
- Exposure Bracketing, Extended Bracketing or Interval Shooting (The
function selected last is used)
- Lens Correction
1
Select [Multi-exposure] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
4
The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of
Shots].
Press the four-way controller (5)
Multi-exposure
and use the four-way controller
Start Shooting
(23) to select the number of
Number of Shots
2times
Auto EV Adjustment
shots.
Select from 2 to 9 shots.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
4
5
Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto EV
Adjustment] and use the four-way controller (45) to
select O or P.
When set to O (On), the exposure is adjusted automatically according to
the number of shots.
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
7
Take a picture.
The composite picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the
shutter release button is pressed. Press the i button during Instant
Review to discard pictures taken up to that point and take pictures again
from the first frame.
The pictures are saved when the set number of shots is taken, and then
the [Multi-exposure] screen appears again.
• If any of the following operations are performed while shooting, the pictures
that have been already taken are saved and Multi-exposure is ended.
- when the Q button, 3 button, four-way controller (2345), M
button or |/Y button is pressed
- when the mode dial is turned
- when Exposure Bracketing is set
4
• When shooting in Multi-exposure mode using Live View, a semi-transparent
composite image of the pictures taken is displayed. (It is not displayed when
the camera is connected to an AV device.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
157
Shooting while Adjusting the
Settings (Auto Bracketing)
Auto Bracketing is a function for shooting while automatically changing the
camera settings. There are two Auto Bracketing modes: Exposure
Bracketing and Extended Bracketing.
1
2
3
4
0 - +
- 0 +
+ 0 -
0 + -
Standard ´ Underexposed ´ Overexposed (default setting)
Underexposed ´ Standard ´ Overexposed
Overexposed ´ Standard ´ Underexposed
Standard ´ Overexposed ´ Underexposed
4
Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically
Changed (Exposure Bracketing)
You can take continuous pictures with different exposures when the
shutter release button is pressed. You can select to take 2 images
(Standard/+), 2 images (Standard/-), 3 images or 5 images. When taking
3 pictures, the first image is exposed with no compensation, the second
image is underexposed (negative compensation) and the third image is
overexposed (positive compensation).
Standard exposure
Underexposure
Overexposure
• Exposure Bracketing is not available in the following situations.
- when the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb)
- when HDR Capture is set
• Exposure Bracketing and Multi-exposure cannot be used at the same time.
The function selected last is used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select l.
Press the four-way controller (3)
Drive Mode
Exposure Bracketing
and use the four-way controller
MUP
(45) to select l, b, or c.
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4+5
0.5EV
3image(s)
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
4
Exposure
Bracketing
l
Takes pictures with the shutter release button.
Exposure
Bracketing +
Self-timer
Takes pictures with the self-timer. Self-timer
operates according to the self-timer (p.143)
setting.
b
Takes pictures with the remote control. Remote
control operates according to the remote control
Continuous Shooting), the shutter is released
immediately.
Exposure
Bracketing +
Remote Control
c
4
5
Turn the front e-dial (R) to set the number of shots.
Select [2 images (+)], [2 images (-)], [3 images] or [5 images].
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to set the bracketing amount.
The following values can be set according to the step interval set in [1.
Step Interval
1/3 EV
Bracketing Amount
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0
1/2 EV
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
159
Available operations
m button +
Rear e-dial (
Adjusts the EV compensation when taking only
underexposed or overexposed images with Exposure
Bracketing. Images are taken with an EV compensation
value set to 0 (intermediate value). (Up to ±8 EV)
)
S
| button
Resets the compensation value to ±0.
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The value for the first image blinks on the monitor.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Press the shutter release button halfway.
When the subject is in focus, the focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder and the EV compensation value appears on the status screen
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.
4
8
Press the shutter release button fully.
Continue to press the shutter release button until the set number of shots
has been captured.
Consecutive images will be taken according to the order set in [8. Auto
• When the focus mode is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is
locked in the first image and is used for subsequent images.
• When you take your finger off the shutter release button during Exposure
Bracketing, the exposure setting will remain effective for twice the amount of
you can take a picture at the next compensation value. In this case,
autofocus works for each image. After about twice the amount of the
exposure metering timer elapses, the camera returns to settings for taking
the first image.
set to [On], even if the shutter release button is not continuously pressed
fully, all images are automatically shot with one press of the shutter release
button.
• You can combine Exposure Bracketing with the built-in flash or external flash
(P-TTL auto only) to change only the flash output continuously. However,
when using an external flash, holding the shutter release button down to take
consecutive images may cause the second and third images to be taken
before the flash is fully charged. Take each image after confirming that
charging is complete.
• If you use Exposure Bracketing frequently, you can assign it to the |/Y
button. (p.279)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
Shooting while Adjusting Other Settings
(Extended Bracketing)
You can save pictures with three different levels of White Balance,
Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adjustment, Contrast and Sharpness.
Unlike Exposure Bracketing, three pictures are saved each time the
shutter is released.
• When Extended Bracketing is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and
cannot be changed. You cannot use Extended Bracketing when the file
format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+].
• When Extended Bracketing is set, the following functions are not available.
• Interval Shooting or Multi-exposure
4
• Cross Processing, Digital Filter or HDR Capture (The function selected last
is used)
1
Select [Extended Bracketing] in the [A Rec. Mode 2]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Extended Bracketing] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Extended Bracketing
OFF
Off
Bracketing Amount
MENU
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select an item and press the
4 button.
Extended Bracketing
OFF
Off
WB
White Balance
Saturation
Hue
High/Low Key Adj
Contrast
S
Sharpness
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Bracketing
Amount] and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)
Extended Bracketing
to select the bracketing amount
Saturation
1
2
3
4
Bracketing Amount
and press the 4 button.
Select [±1] (default setting), [±2], [±3] or
[±4].
For [White Balance], select from [BA±1]
(default setting), [BA±2], [BA±3], [GM±1],
[GM±2] or [GM±3].
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
4
6
7
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera returns to Capture mode.
Take a picture.
Three images are saved.
• Exposure Bracketing and Extended Bracketing can be used at the same
time. When used at the same time, each time the shutter is released for
Exposure Bracketing, three images with Extended Bracketing applied are
saved.
• Parameters that cannot be set due to the image finishing tone setting of
Custom Image also cannot be set for Extended Bracketing. (Example: When
set to [Monochrome], Saturation and Hue cannot be selected for Extended
• When [Fine Sharpness] or [Extra Sharpness] is set for Custom Image, the
sharpness of Extended Bracketing operates as Fine Sharpness or Extra
Sharpness.
• When [Contrast] is set for Custom Image, the contrast of Extended
Bracketing operates according to the [Contrast] setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters
You can apply a filter when taking pictures.
The following filters can be selected.
Filter Name
Toy Camera
Effect
Parameter
Shading Level: +1 to +3
For taking pictures that
look as if taken with a toy Blur: +1 to +3
camera.
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Toning: -3 to +3
For taking pictures with
the look of old photos.
Retro
Frame Composite: None/Thin/
Medium/Thick
4
For taking pictures with
high contrasts.
High Contrast
+1 to +5
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extractable Range of Color 1:
-2 to +2
For extracting two
specific colors and
making the rest of the
image black and white.
Extract Color
Extracted Color 2: Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2:
-2 to +2
For taking pictures with a Soft Focus: +1 to +3
soft focus throughout the
Soft
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
image.
Shape: Cross/Star/Snow Crystal/
Heart/Musical Note
For taking pictures of
night scenes or lights
reflected on water with a
special sparkling look by
adding extra glitter to the
highlights.
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large
Starburst
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
For taking pictures that
look as if taken with a
fish-eye lens.
Fish-eye
Weak/Medium/Strong
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
163
Filter Name
Effect
Parameter
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow
Customize and save a
filter to your own
preferences.
Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
Custom Filter
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/
Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON
For taking pictures with Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/
the selected color filter. Green/Yellow
Select from 18 filters (6
4
Color
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark
colors × 3 tones).
*1 Not available when the exposure mode is set to C (Movie).
*2 Available only when the exposure mode is set to C (Movie).
• When Digital Filter is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot
be changed. You cannot use Digital Filter when the file format is set to [RAW]
or [RAW+].
• When Digital Filter is set, the following functions are not available.
- Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure, Continuous Shooting
- Extended Bracketing or HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)
Depending on the filter used, it may take longer to save images.
1
Select [Digital Filter] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The screen for selecting a filter appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
2
3
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select a filter.
OFF
Starburst
AE.L
OK
MENU
Cancel
Check
OK
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the parameter and
the four-way controller (45) to
adjust the parameter’s value.
Shape
4
AE.L
OK
MENU
Cancel
Check
OK
Available operations
Main switch (|)
Uses Digital Preview to preview the background
image with the filter effect applied. (Not available
when the exposure mode is set to C (Movie).)
L button
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and
press the 4 button.
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• When the exposure mode is set to C (Movie), change the settings from
• Select [Not use any filters] in Step 2 to finish shooting with digital filter.
• You can also apply digital filter after shooting them to JPEG/RAW images in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
165
Shooting with Live View
You can shoot a picture while displaying the real-time image on the
monitor.
• The image in Live View may differ from the captured image if the brightness
of the subject is low or high.
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image
may flicker.
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not
be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become
stable before shooting.
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.
• Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. When Live View is ended
after the elapse of 5 minutes, Live View can be restarted by pressing the U
button.
4
• If you continue shooting with Live View for a prolonged period, the internal
temperature of the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality images. It
is recommended that you turn off Live View when not shooting. To prevent
the image quality from degrading, allow enough time for the camera to cool
down while shooting with long exposures or recording movies.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high, l (temperature
warning) will appear on the monitor and Live View may not be available.
• If Live View is used in places where the camera may become hot, such as in
direct sunlight, l (temperature warning) may appear on the monitor. Cancel
Live View, as the internal temperature of the camera is rising.
• If Live View is used even after l (temperature warning) appears, Live View
may end before 5 minutes elapse. Shooting with the viewfinder is available
even if Live View is ended.
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur in
the Live View image and/or captured image.
• During Live View, nothing is displayed in the viewfinder.
• Holding the camera by hand and shooting while viewing the monitor may
cause camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.
• The field of view of the image display is nearly 100%.
• You can use the provided AV cable (I-AVC7) or a commercially available
• Live View is not displayed when data is being saved to an SD Memory Card.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
Setting Live View
You can set the display and autofocus mode for Live View.
1
Select [Live View] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Live View] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select an autofocus
Live View
Autofocus Method
Show Grid
Info Overlay
4
method.
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Gives autofocus priority to detected faces and performs
contrast autofocus. A yellow frame appears for a main
face (white frames appear for other faces), and
autofocus and automatic exposure are performed for
the main face. (default setting)
I
Face Detection
AF
The face detection is not performed when the focus
mode is set to \.
i
Contrast AF
Displays Live View and performs autofocus based on
the information obtained from the image sensor.
Cancels Live View and performs autofocus with the AF
sensor.
If the shutter release button is pressed halfway during
Live View, the Live View image will disappear and the
autofocus system operates. Once focused, the Live
View image will be displayed again.
S
Phase Difference
AF
3
4
Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Show Grid]
and press the four-way controller (5).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
167
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a grid display type and
press the 4 button.
Live View
Autofocus Method
Show Grid
Info Overlay
OFF
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Select from [Off] (default setting), e
(4x4 Grid), f (Golden Section) or g
(Scale).
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Info Overlay],
[Histogram] or [Bright/Dark Area].
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
4
8
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
It takes more time to focus on the subject when using I or i than when
using S. It is also difficult for the camera to focus on the following objects (or
under the following conditions).
- objects with poor contrast
- objects with no vertical contrast, such as horizontal stripes
- objects with constantly changing brightness, shape, or color, such as a
water fountain
- objects whose distance from the camera changes
- small objects
- objects appearing in both the foreground and background
- when using a special filter
- objects at the edge of the screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
Taking a Still Picture
1
Select an exposure mode.
Set the mode dial to any mode other than C.
2
Press the U button.
4
The mirror pops up and a real-time image is displayed on the monitor.
Press the U button again to exit Live View.
Live View display
(All of the indicators are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)
1
2 3 4 5 6 7
8
USER
P
P
SHIFT
11
9
10
12
13
14
15
+1.0
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5
2000 F2.8 ISO3200
1234
2000 F2.8 ISO400
[
]
[
]
37
16 17 1819 20
21
22
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
Exposure Mode
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Custom Image
Extended Bracketing/Multi-
exposure/Interval Shooting/
Digital Filter/HDR Capture
8
9
Battery level
Adjusting composition
10 Temperature warning
11 Electronic Level
12 Contrast AF frame
13 Phase Difference AF frame/AF point
14 EV Compensation
15 Histogram
7
Number of shots using Multi-
exposure/Cross Processing
16 AE Lock
17 Shutter speed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
169
18 Aperture value
19 EV bar
22 Main face detection frame
(Face Detection AF)
20 Sensitivity
23 Face detection frame (Face
Detection AF)
21 Remaining image storage capacity
* Indicator 9 is displayed when switching to Live View after adjusting the
A
When the Electronic Level function is assigned to the |/Y button
* Indicator 13 (Phase Difference AF frame) is displayed in white during Live
View. When the subject is in focus, a green square frame is displayed
instead. It turns red when the subject is not in focus. It is not displayed
when the focus mode is set to \.
* When 17, 18, and 20 can be changed, 5 appears next to the set value.
* Indicators 22 and 23 are displayed when [Autofocus Method] is set to I
and the camera detects person’s face(s). (Up to 16 face recognition
frames are displayed on the monitor.) When the subject is in focus, a
green frame is displayed. It turns red when the subject is not in focus.
4
Available operations
M button
Enlarges the image.
2, 4, or 6 times original size (when the focus mode is
=)
2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 times original size (when the focus
mode is \)
| button
Returns the position of the display area to the center
(during enlarged view).
Press and hold 4 Switches the function of the four-way controller
button *1
(2345) to Change AF point or direct key operation.
4 button *1
Returns the position of the AF point to the center
(when Change AF point is enabled).
Four-way controller Changes the AF point (when Change AF point is
(2345)
enabled).
Moves the display area (during enlarged view).
*1 Available only when [Autofocus Method] is I or i, and the focus mode is l
or the AF point switching dial is set to j (Select).
3
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.
• When the focus mode is set to k and [Autofocus Method] is set to i,
the camera focuses on the center of the screen when autofocus starts and
then automatically tracks the subject when it is in focus. When [Autofocus
Method] is set to I, the camera automatically tracks the detected face.
• Images captured in magnified display are recorded at normal size.
• You can check the depth of field on the monitor by turning the main switch to
| during Live View.
The status screen and control panel cannot be displayed during Live View. To
change the settings, press the 3 button and change them from each
menu.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
171
Recording Movies
You can record movies using Live View.
Changing the Movie Settings
You can record movies with monaural audio in AVI file format.
1
Select [Movie] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Movie] screen appears.
4
2
Press the four-way controller
1280x720
00:31'55"
(5), use the four-way controller
(23) to select the number of
recorded pixels, and press the
4 button.
FullHD
25
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Sound
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HD
30
HD
25
VGA
30
VGA
25
Movie Aperture Control Fixed
Shake Reduction
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Recorded Pixels
Pixels
Aspect Ratio
16:9
Frame Rate
25 fps
a
1920×1080
1280×720
1280×720
640×480
640×480
b
b
c
c
(default setting)
16:9
30 fps
16:9
25 fps
4:3
30 fps
4:3
25 fps
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quality Level]
and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the quality
level and press the 4 button.
Select from C (Best; default setting), D (Better) and E (Good).
When the recorded pixels and quality level are changed, the amount of
recordable time at that setting appears at the top right of the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound] and
press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select g or Z and
press the 4 button.
Records sound. (default setting)
Does not record sound.
g
Z
7
Set Cross Processing and Digital Filter as necessary.
4
8
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie
Aperture Control] and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the [Fixed] or
[Auto] and press the 4 button.
The movie is recorded at the aperture value set before movie
recording starts. (default setting)
Fixed
Auto
The aperture is controlled automatically.
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shake
Reduction] and press the 5 button.
11 Use the four-way controller (23) to select k or l
and press the 4 button.
Uses Shake Reduction.
k
l
Does not use Shake Reduction. (default setting)
12 Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to record a movie.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
173
Connecting a Microphone
You can connect a commercially available stereo microphone to the
microphone terminal on the camera and record stereo sound. Using an
external microphone can also help to reduce the possibility of recording
camera operation sounds.
The following specifications are recommended for external microphones.
• Plug:
Stereo mini plug (ø3.5 mm)
Stereo electret condenser
• Format:
• Power:
Plug-in Power Method (operating voltage of 2.0 V or lower)
2.2 kΩ
• Impedance:
4
1
Turn off the camera.
2
Open the microphone
terminal cover and
connect the plug of the
microphone to the
microphone terminal
on the camera.
3
Turn the camera on.
If the external microphone is disconnected during recording, the camera
cannot switch to the internal microphone until recording has stopped. No sound
will be recorded.
If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, the sound
can be played back in stereo when you use a commercially available HDMI
an AV cable to output the movie, monaural sound is played back.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
Recording Movies
1
Set the mode dial to C.
Live View for movie recording is
displayed.
Sound
4
HD
+1.5
-2
1
1
+2
:
F2.8
00 30'00"
Recordable Time
Shake Reduction
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S) Changes the aperture value when [Movie Aperture
Control] is set to [Fixed]. (default setting)
| button
Sets the aperture value to obtain a proper exposure.
(default setting)
Returns the position of the display area to the center
(during enlarged view).
m button +
Performs EV compensation (up to ±2 EV).
Rear e-dial (S)
M button
Enlarges the image.
2, 4, or 6 times original size (when the focus mode is
=)
2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 times original size (when the focus
mode is \)
Press and hold 4 Switches the function of the four-way controller
button *1
(2345) to Change AF point or direct key operation.
4 button *1
Returns the position of the AF point to the center
(when Change AF point is enabled).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
175
Four-way controller Changes the AF point (when Change AF point is
(2345)
enabled).
Moves the display area (during enlarged view).
*1 Available only when [Autofocus Method] is I or i, and the focus mode is l
or the AF point switching dial is set to j (Select).
2
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.
3
4
Press the shutter release button fully.
4
Recording of the movie starts.
Press the shutter release button again.
Recording stops.
• When [Sound] is set to g (On), the camera operation sounds are also
recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do
not operate the camera while recording.
• While recording a movie, the autofocus system does not operate.
• The flash is not available.
• When recording movies using image processing, such as Digital Filter, some
frames may be dropped from the recorded movie.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high during movie
recording, the recording may be terminated to protect the camera circuitry.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
• You can record movies continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.
• Live View images in C mode are displayed according to the [Live View]
Dark Area warning is not displayed during movie recording.
• You can set the functions for when the front/rear e-dial or the | button is
• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the AC adapter
kit K-AC50 (optional) is recommended. (p.53)
• The sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].
• If you want to view a movie on an external monitor while recording it, connect
output a movie using the PC/AV terminal while recording.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
177
Playing Back Movies
Recorded movies can be played back in Playback mode in the same
manner as saved images.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie to
play back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
4
3
Press the four-way controller
(2).
100-0001
Movie playback starts.
Movie 10min00sec
Available operations
Four-way controller (2)
Rear e-dial (S)
Pauses/Resumes playback.
Volume control (6 levels)
Four-way controller (5)
Forwards a frame (during pause).
Fast-forwards playback while pressed.
Press and hold four-way
controller (5)
Four-way controller (4)
Reverses playback./
Reverses a frame (during pause).
Press and hold four-way
Fast-reverses playback while pressed.
controller (4)
Four-way controller (3)
Stops playback./
Displays the playback mode palette (when
L button
Saves the displayed image in JPEG format
(during pause).
When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
• You can use the provided AV cable I-AVC7 or a commercially available HDMI
cable to play back the recorded movies on a TV screen or other AV devices.
• Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo,
monaural sound is played back when you output the movie via the PC/AV
terminal. When you output the movie via the mini HDMI terminal, sound is
played back in stereo.
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie
You can capture a single frame from a movie and save it as a JPEG still
picture.
1
Press the four-way controller (2)
movie, and display the frame to
save as a still picture.
Frame number/Total number
of frames
4
90/1800
AE-L
While paused, you can advance the
movie in one-frame increments using the
four-way controller (45).
The frame number and total number of
frames appear at the top right of the
screen.
Movie 10min00sec
2
3
Press the L button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
Saves the image as a new file
The captured image is saved as a new
image.
Save as
Cancel
OK
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
179
Editing Movies
Movies can be divided and unwanted segments can be deleted.
1
Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie to
play back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.
4
3
4
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [ (Movie
Editing) and press the 4 button.
The movie editing screen appears.
5
Select point(s) where you want to
divide the movie.
Up to four points can be selected.
00min00sec
10min00sec
OK
MENU
Exit
OK
Available operations
Four-way controller (2)
Plays back/Pauses a movie.
Four-way controller (5)
Moves forward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the next dividing point (during
playback).
Four-way controller (4)
Moves backward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the previous dividing point (during
playback).
Rear e-dial (S)
Volume control (6 levels)
| button
Confirms/cancels a dividing point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
6
Press the i button to delete
unwanted segments.
The screen to select segment(s) to delete
is displayed.
00min02sec
10min00sec
Select segments for deletion
OK
MENU
Available operations
Four-way controller (45) Moves the selection frame
4 button
Confirms/cancels a selection of a segment to
delete
3 button
Exits the screen to select segments to delete
4
7
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
00min00sec
10min00sec
OK
MENU
Exit
OK
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
Saves divided movie
as separate files
The movie is divided at the specified
points and the unwanted segments are
deleted from it. And then the divided
movie is saved as separate files and
displayed on the screen.
Save as
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
Specify the dividing points in chronological order from the beginning of the
movie. When canceling the selected dividing points, cancel each of them in
reverse order (from the end of the movie to the beginning). While specifying
dividing point(s), you cannot select the frames prior to the last selected frame
as a dividing point, or cancel the selections of the dividing point(s).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
Flash Characteristics in Each
Exposure Mode
Using the Flash in b (Shutter Priority) Mode
• When taking a moving subject, you can use the flash to change the blur
effect.
• Any desired shutter speed of 1/180 sec. or slower can be set for taking a
flash photograph.
• The aperture value automatically changes according to the ambient
brightness.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens is used.
Using the Flash in c (Aperture Priority) Mode
5
• You can set the desired aperture value to take a flash photograph when
you want to change the depth of field or shoot a subject farther away.
• The shutter speed automatically changes with the ambient brightness.
• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 sec. to a
shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens is used.
Using the Slow-speed Sync
You can use slow-speed-sync in b (Shutter Priority) mode when shooting
portraits with the sunset in the background. Both the portrait and the
background are captured beautifully.
• Slow-speed Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function
or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera
shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.
• Slow-speed Sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
183
Using e/K/c Mode
1
Set the mode dial to e, K or c.
2
3
4
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
Select G or H and press the 4 button.
The shutter speed is set slower to give a proper exposure for the
background.
5
5
Take a picture.
Using b/L/a Mode
1
Set the mode dial to b, L or a.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
3
4
Select E or F and press the 4 button.
Set the shutter speed (for b mode) or shutter speed and
aperture value (for L or a mode).
Set so a proper exposure is obtained at a shutter speed of 1/180 second
or slower.
5
6
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.
Take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync
Trailing Curtain Sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter
curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,
Trailing Curtain Sync and Slow-speed Sync produce different effects
depending on when the flash is discharged.
For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing Curtain Sync,
trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the
car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will
include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing light behind it.
5
Slow-speed Sync
Trailing Curtain Sync
(Leading Curtain Sync)
1
Set the mode dial to any mode other than B, M or C.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
3
4
Select I or k and press the 4 button.
Press the E button.
The built-in flash pops up.
5
Take a picture.
Trailing Curtain Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction
function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid
camera shake.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
185
Distance and Aperture when Using
the Built-in Flash
Relationships between the guide number, aperture and distance must be
considered when shooting with the flash to obtain a correct exposure.
Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not sufficient.
Sensitivity Built-in Flash Guide Number Sensitivity Built-in flash guide number
ISO 100
ISO 200
ISO 400
ISO 800
ISO 1600
Approx. 13
Approx. 18.4
Approx. 26
Approx. 36.8
Approx. 52
ISO 3200
ISO 6400
ISO 12800
ISO 25600 *1
ISO 51200 *1
Approx. 73.5
Approx. 104
Approx. 147
Approx. 208
Approx. 294
*1 This can be used when [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [
A
Custom Setting 1] menu is set to [On].
Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value
5
The following equation calculates the distance of the flash for aperture values.
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5 *
* The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value
which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.
Example: When the sensitivity is ISO 100 and the aperture value is F2.8
L1 = 13 ÷ 2.8 = approx. 4.6 (m)
L2 = 4.6 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.9 (m)
Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.9 m to 4.6 m.
However, the built-in flash in this camera cannot be used when the
distance is 0.7 m or less. When the flash is used at closer than 0.7
m, it causes vignetting in the picture corners, light is distributed
unevenly and a picture may be overexposed.
Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance
The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting distances.
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance
Example: When the sensitivity is ISO 100 and shooting distance is 4 m,
the aperture value is:
F = 13 ÷ 4 = 3.25
If the resulting number (3.25, in the above example) is not available
as a lens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (2.8, in the
above example) is generally used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in
Flash
Depending on the lens used with the X, even if a lens without a hood
is attached, the use of the built-in flash may not be available or may be
limited due to vignetting.
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without
problems.
* The following lenses were evaluated without a hood.
Unavailable due to vignetting
Lens Name
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)
DA12-24mm F4ED AL
DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)
E
FA 300mm F2.8ED (IF)
5
E
FA 600mm F4ED (IF)
E
FA 250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)
Available depending on other factors
Lens Name
Restrictions
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is
less than 20 mm.
F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5
When the focal length is less than 28 mm or
when the focal length is 28 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.
DA16-45mm F4ED AL
When the focal length is 20 mm or less or
when the focal length is 35 mm and the
shooting distance is less than 1.5 m,
vignetting may occur.
E
DA 16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM
When the focal length is less than 24 mm or
when the focal length is 24 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.
DA17-70mm F4AL (IF) SDM
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is
less than 35 mm.
DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is
28 mm and the shooting distance is less than
1 m.
E
FA 28-70mm F2.8AL
FA SOFT 28mm F2.8
FA SOFT 85mm F2.8
Built-in flash always discharges fully.
Built-in flash always discharges fully.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
187
Using an External Flash (Optional)
Using an optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes, such as P-TTL auto flash
mode, depending on the external flash being used. See the chart below for
details.
(z: Available #: Restricted ×: Not available)
Flash
Built-in
Flash
AF540FGZ AF200FG
AF360FGZ AF160FC
Camera Function
Red-eye reduction flash
Auto flash discharge
z
z
z
z
z
z
After the flash is charged, the camera
automatically switches to the flash sync
speed.
z
z
z
z
5
Aperture value is automatically set in e
mode and b mode.
z
z
z
z
P-TTL auto flash (appropriate sensitivity:
ISO 100 to 3200)
z
Slow-speed Sync
z
z
×
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
×
Flash exposure compensation
AF assist light of external flash
Trailing Curtain Sync
z
×
Contrast-control-sync flash mode
Slave flash
#
#
×
×
×
×
×
High-speed flash sync
Wireless flash
#
*1 Available only when using a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units, or a combination of an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ
unit and the built-in flash is required.
Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus)
cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
About the Display Panel for AF360FGZ
The AF360FGZ itself does not have the function to set the FORMAT size
to [DIGITAL]. However, when it is used with a SLR Digital Camera, the
difference in focal length between a 35 mm camera and the
X
is
automatically calculated based on the difference in angle of view and is
displayed on the panel (when using DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens).
The conversion indicator appears and the FORMAT size indicator
disappears when the exposure metering timer of the X is on (it
returns to 35 mm format display when the exposure metering timer is
turned off).
85mm
/77mm
28mm
/24mm
Lens Focal Length
50mm 35mm
20mm 18mm
Exposure metering timer
Off
24mm*
16mm*
85mm 70mm 50mm 35mm 28mm
58mm 48mm 34mm 24mm 19mm
Exposure metering timer
On
5
* Using wide-angle panel
Using P-TTL Auto Mode
You can use [P-TTL Auto] with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit. The flash pre-flashes before the actual flash and
confirms the subject (the distance, brightness, contrast, whether it is
backlit, etc.) using the camera 77-segment metering sensor. The flash
output for the actual flash is adjusted based on the information obtained
from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography with more accurate
exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
2
3
4
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL Auto].
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then
take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
189
• P-TTL Auto is only available with an AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit.
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please refer to
the external flash manual.
• The flash does not discharge if the subject is bright enough when the flash
mode is C or i. Therefore, it may not be suitable for Daylight-Sync
shooting.
• Never press the E button when any external flash unit is attached to the
camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both at
once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode
With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take a
picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 second.
5
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) to the camera.
2
3
4
Set the exposure mode to b or a.
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (High-speed
flash sync).
5
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then
take a picture.
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
•
High-speed flash sync is available only when the shutter speed is set faster
than 1/180 sec.
• High-speed flash sync is not available when the exposure mode is set to p
(Bulb).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
Using Flash in Wireless Mode
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the
built-in flash with one or more external flashes, you can shoot in P-TTL
flash mode without connecting the flash units with a cord.
• Set the power switch of the external flash to WIRELESS.
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use
high-speed flash sync in wireless mode. This function cannot be used in
combination with the built-in flash.
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to the
camera to SLAVE.
Setting the Channel for the External Flash
First, set the channel for the external flash unit.
5
1
Set the channel for the external flash unit.
2
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the
shutter release button halfway.
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.
• When set to r mode, the channel currently set for the built-in flash is
displayed in the viewfinder for 10 seconds.
• Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of the
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on the
external flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
191
Using the Built-in Flash in Wireless Mode
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in
combination with the built-in flash.
1
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
2
Select r and press the 4
button.
Flash Mode
Wireless Mode
The camera is ready to take a picture.
The channel for the built-in flash is
displayed in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel. The factory default setting is
CH1.
0.0
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
5
• r cannot be set when the exposure mode is set to B (Green).
• When the drive mode is set to i (Remote Control (3s delay)), d (Mirror
Lock-up) or e (Mirror Lock-up remote control), or the lens aperture is not
set to the s position, r cannot be selected.
Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method
You can change the built-in flash discharge method used in wireless
mode.
Discharges the built-in flash as a master. (default
setting)
1
2
On
Off
Discharges the built-in flash as a control flash.
HSb (High-speed flash sync) is not available with the built-in flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
Wireless Shooting
Using a Combination of the Built-in Flash and an External Flash
Unit
1
Remove the external flash unit after the channel is set on
the camera, and place it at the desired location.
2
3
Set the camera flash to r mode, and press the E button.
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take
a picture.
Using a Combination of External Flash Units
5
1
Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly
connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].
Sets the camera to discharge both the flash directly
MASTER
connected to the camera and the wireless flash unit.
Sets the camera to discharge the flash directly connected
CONTROL
to the camera as a control flash only, not as the main
flash.
2
3
On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash
mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel
as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place
it at the desired location.
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take
a picture.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off in wireless mode.
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and performing
high-speed flash sync shooting in wireless mode, set the flash directly
connected to the camera to high-speed flash sync mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
193
Wireless Flash Control (P-TTL Flash Mode)
When using external flash units (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) for
wireless shooting, the following information is exchanged between
the flash units before the flash is discharged.
Press the shutter release button fully.
È
1 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash
(relays the flash mode of the camera).
2 The wireless remote flash emits a test flash (relays confirmation
of subject).
3 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash
(relays flash output to the wireless remote flash).
*
The flash directly connected to the camera will emit a control flash
one more time after this to relay the flash duration time when HSb
(High-speed flash sync) is set.
5
4 The wireless remote flash discharges.
When the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the
to [On] for the built-in flash, all the flashes will discharge simultaneously.
Red-Eye Reduction
As with the built-in flash, the red-eye reduction function is available
with an external flash. However, this function may not be available on
some flashes or may have restrictions for usage conditions. Refer to
the chart on p.187.
• The red-eye reduction function works by discharging the flash twice
even when only an external flash is used. (p.80)
• If the red-eye reduction function of the built-in flash is used when the
external flash is set as the slave unit or with the wireless function, the
pre-flash for red-eye reduction will trigger the external flash. Do not use
the red-eye reduction function when using a slave unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Trailing Curtain Sync
When using the built-in flash with an external flash (AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ) that is set to the Trailing Curtain Sync mode, the built-in
flash will also use this mode. Confirm that both flash units are fully
charged before shooting.
Connecting an External Flash with an
Extension Cord
When using the built-in flash with an external flash that does not have a
wireless flash mode function such as AF200FG, attach the Hot Shoe
Adapter FG (optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and connect these
with the Extension Cord F5P (optional) as shown in the illustration below.
The Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted to your tripod using the
tripod screw.
5
Only a P-TTL auto flash can be used in combination with the built-in flash.
When combining with the built-in flash
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
195
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension
Cords
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination with
the built-in flash. You can use the extension cord connection terminal on
the flash to connect the AF540FGZ. You can connect AF360FGZ or
AF200FG units as shown in the illustration below. Connect an external
flash and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe Adapter
F with external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (optional).
Refer to the manual of the flash for details.
When combining two or more external flashes
5
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts,
such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-in
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash
allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of
light discharged from multiple units.
• The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts,
such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
1
Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly.
5
2
3
Set the sync mode for the external flash to contrast-
control-sync mode.
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are
fully charged and then take a picture.
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast-control-sync mode
is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master unit)
: 1 (slave units). When an external flash is used in combination with the built-
in flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).
• When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-
in flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
197
X-sync Socket
You can connect an external flash to the
camera with a sync cord by using the X-sync
socket.
Remove the Sync socket 2P cap and
connect a sync cord to the X-sync socket.
• The use of high-voltage or high-current external flashes may cause a camera
breakdown.
• Flashes with reversed polarity (the center of the sync plug is minus) cannot
be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and flash.
• When a sync cord is connected to the X-sync socket, linked functions will not
work.
5
• To prevent vignetting caused from Trailing Curtain Sync, it is recommended
to take a test shot using a shutter speed one level slower than the flash sync
speed.
•
The contact of the X-sync socket is not dust-proof and water-resistant. Attach
the provided Sync socket 2P cap when not in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200
Setting a File Format
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels
You can select the number of recorded pixels from p, J, P and i.
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file
size. The file size will also vary according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.
The default setting is p.
Recorded Pixels
Pixels
Paper Size
14"×17" / A2 paper
10"×12" / A3 paper
8"×10" / A4 paper
5"×7" / A5 paper
p
J
P
i
4928×3264
3936×2624
3072×2048
1728×1152
The paper sizes above are references for optimal printing by recorded
pixels. The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the
quality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of
other factors.
6
1
Select [JPEG Recorded Pixels] in the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the number of recorded
4928x3264
120
JPEG
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
D-Range Setting
Lens Correction
16M
10M
6M
pixels and press the 4 button.
When the number of recorded pixels is
changed, the number of pixels appears at
the top left of the screen and the number
of recordable images for that setting
appears at the top right of the screen.
2M
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
201
Setting the JPEG Quality Level
You can set the image quality level (compression ratio). The file size will
also vary according to the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] setting. The default
setting is C (Best).
Z Premium
Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.
C Best
D
E
Better
Good
Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.
1
Select [JPEG Quality] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a quality level and press
the 4 button.
120
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
JPEG
16M
6
AUTO AF Point Setting
D-Range Setting
Lens Correction
When the quality level is changed, the
number of recordable images at that
quality level appears at the top right of the
screen.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
Setting a File Format
You can set the format of image files.
Captures images in JPEG format. (default setting)
JPEG You can change the number of recorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded
Pixels] and the image quality level in [JPEG Quality].
RAW format is a CMOS sensor output format saved without
processing.
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are not
applied to the captured images, but they are saved as actual original
information. When you perform the development process by using
RAW
(PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4) after transferring RAW data to a
computer, you can create JPEG images with these effects.
Images are saved in both RAW and JPEG formats.
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the |/Y button, you
can press the |/Y button to temporarily change the file format and
RAW+
6
When Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is
set, the file format is set to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. To change the file
format, turn these functions off.
1
Select [File Format] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a file format.
120
File Format
JPEG
JPEG Recorded Pixels RAW
When the file format is changed, the
number of recordable images appears at
the top right of the screen.
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
D-Range Setting
RAW+
Lens Correction
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
4
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
203
Setting the RAW File Format
You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAW
format.
1
2
3
4 5
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
ISO
NR
AUTO
AUTO
NR
Color Space
RAW File Format
PEF
DNG
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
PENTAX’s original RAW file format (default setting)
PEF
General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by
Adobe Systems
DNG
Temporarily Changing the File Format using the
|/Y Button
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the |/Y button, you can
temporarily change the file format.
6
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [|/Y
Button] and press the four-way controller (5).
The [|/Y Button] screen appears.
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [One Push File Format]
and press the 4 button.
RAW/Fx Button
RAW One Push File Format
Exposure Bracketing
Digital Preview
Electronic Level
Composition Adjust.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Cancel after 1
shot] and use the four-way
controller (45) to select O or P.
RAW/Fx Button
RAW One Push File Format
Cancel after 1 shot
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
MENU
The recording format returns to the original file format after a
picture is taken. (default setting)
O
P
The setting is canceled when the following operations are
performed.
- the |/Y button is pressed again
- the Q button or 3 button is pressed
- the main switch is turned off
- the mode dial is turned
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.
6
The left side is the [File Format] setting and the right side is the file format
when the |/Y button is pressed.
Press the four-way controller
RAW/Fx Button
(5), and use the four-way
RAW One Push File Format
controller (23) to select a file
Cancel after 1 shot
format when the |/Y button
is pressed.
JPEG
RAW
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
8
9
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button three times.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
205
Setting the White Balance
White balance is a function for adjusting the color of an image so that white
objects appear white. Set the white balance if you are not satisfied with the
color balance of pictures taken with white balance set to F (Auto), or
to intentionally apply a creative effect to your images.
Item
Setting
Automatically adjusts the white balance. Approx. 4,000 to
(default setting) 8,000K
Color Temperature *1
Auto
F
G
Daylight
Shade
Cloudy
For use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K
For use when taking pictures in the shade.
Approx. 8,000K
H
^
It reduces the bluish color tones in a picture.
For use when taking pictures on cloudy days. Approx. 6,000K
For use when taking pictures under
fluorescent lighting. Select the type of
fluorescent light.
Fluorescent
Light
D Fluorescent Light Daylight Color
N Fluorescent Light Daylight White
W Fluorescent Light Cool White
Approx. 6,500K
Approx. 5,000K
Approx. 4,200K
Approx. 3,000K
J
6
L
Fluorescent Light Warm White
For use when taking pictures under light
bulbs or other tungsten light. It reduces
the reddish color tones in a picture.
Tungsten
Light
Approx. 2,850K
I
For use when taking pictures using the
built-in flash.
Flash
Approx. 5,400K
-
L
Use this to keep and strengthen the color
tone of the light source in the image.
CTE
Use this to manually adjust the white
balance according to the lighting so that
white objects appear as a natural white.
You can save three settings.
Manual 1-3
-
-
K
Color
Temperature
1~3
Use figures to set the color temperature.
You can save three settings.
K
*1 The color temperatures (K) shown above are all estimates. These do not indicate precise
colors.
*2 CTE = Color Temperature Enhancement
White balance is fixed to F when Cross Processing is set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
1
Press the four-way controller (4) in Capture mode.
The [White Balance] screen appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the
background.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select the white balance.
White Balance
Auto
CTE
AE.L
K1
OK
OK
MENU
Cancel
Check
Available operations
Main switch (|)
Uses Digital Preview to preview the background
image with the setting applied.
L button
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and
press the 4 button.
6
3
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• The camera automatically performs fine-tuning even when the light source is
specified. The color temperature of the light source is fixed when [10. WB
• Because the light source changes when a flash discharges, you can set the
white balance for when the flash discharges. Select [Auto White Balance],
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
207
Fine-tuning the White Balance
You can fine-tune the white balance setting.
1
Perform the desired settings in Step 2 on p.206.
2
Press the four-way controller (5).
The fine-tuning screen appears.
3
Fine-tune the white balance.
Shade
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.
G
B
A
G1
0
M
0
OK
MENU
Cancel
Check
OK
6
Available operations
Four-way controller (23) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green
(G) and magenta (M).
Four-way controller (45) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B)
and amber (A).
| button
Resets the adjustment value.
4
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
When set to K, the white balance can also be measured by pressing the
shutter release button fully (except while recording a movie).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
Adjusting the White Balance Manually
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when
taking pictures. With the manual white balance, the camera can store
delicate shades that cannot be precisely adjusted with the white balance
preset values provided in the camera. This provides the optimum white
balance for your surroundings. Up to three settings can be saved.
1
controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller
White Balance
Manual 1
(23) to select K1 to K3 and
press the four-way controller
(5).
1
2
3
CTE
1
K1
AE.L
6
OK
OK
MENU
Cancel
Check
3
4
5
Under the light to measure the white balance, fully display
a white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a white
area as the subject.
Press the shutter release button fully.
Set the focus mode to \ when the shutter cannot be released.
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.
Use the rear e-dial (S) to select
1
the entire screen or spot area for
the measuring range.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
209
6
7
When a spot area is selected, use the four-way controller
(2345) to move the frame to the position you want to
measure.
Press the 4 button.
1
Manual
White Balance
The white balance fine-tuning screen
appears when measuring is completed.
Adjust the white balance as necessary.
SHUTTER
Adjust
G
B
A
0
0
0
M
AE.L
OK
MENU
Cancel
Check
OK
8
9
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
6
• No image is recorded when the shutter release button is pressed to adjust
the white balance.
• The message [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears
when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button while displayed to
remeasure the white balance.
• If a picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, the white balance
may not be adjusted. In this case, adjust exposure to the correct amount level
before adjusting the white balance.
• When the mode dial is set to C (Movie), the white balance cannot be
measured. Adjust the white balance in any exposure mode other than C
before recording a movie.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
Adjusting the White Balance with Color
Temperature
Use figures to set the color temperature. Up to three settings can be
saved.
1
controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select K1 to K3 and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Color Temperature] screen appears.
3
Adjust the color temperature
with the front or rear e-dial.
Color
Temperature
K1
G
5000K
6
B
A
0
0
M
0
OK
MENU
Cancel
Check
OK
Color temperature steps vary depending on the e-dial.
E-dial
Kelvin
1 Step (100K)
Mired
1 Step (20M)
5 Steps (100M)
Front (R)
Rear (S)
10 Steps (1,000K)
*1 The default setting for Color Temperature step units is [Kelvin]. You can change the
fine-tuning.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
211
4
5
Press the 4 button.
The settings are saved and the camera returns to the [White Balance]
screen.
Turn the main switch to | to display Digital Preview with the set color
temperature.
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Color Temperature
The color of light shifts towards blue as the color temperature rises,
and towards red as the color temperature falls. Color temperature
describes this change in light color in terms of absolute temperature
(K: Kelvin). This camera is capable of setting the white balance to
enable taking pictures with natural coloring under a variety of lighting
conditions.
6
Red tint
Blue tint
[
]
2000
3000
4000 5000 6000
8000 10000 12000
K
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
Setting the Color Space
You can select a color space to use.
sRGB
Sets to sRGB color space. (default setting)
AdobeRGB Sets to AdobeRGB color space.
1
2
3
4 5
D-Range Setting
ISO AUTO Setting
High-ISO NR
ISO
NR
AUTO
AUTO
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
NR
Color Space
sRGB
RAW File Format
Ad
ob
e
RGB
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
The file naming system changes depending on the color space setting as
shown below.
For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG
For AdobeRGB: _IGPxxxx.JPG
6
“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential
number. (p.301)
Color Space
Color ranges for various input/output devices, such as digital
cameras, monitors, and printers, differ. This color range is called the
Color Space.
To recreate different color spaces in different devices, standard color
spaces have been proposed. This camera supports sRGB and
AdobeRGB.
sRGB is mainly used for devices such as a computer.
AdobeRGB covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for
occupational uses such as industrial printing.
An image created in AdobeRGB may appear lighter than an image
created in sRGB when output from an sRGB compatible device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
213
Saving the White Balance Setting of a
Captured Image
You can copy the white balance setting of a captured image and save it as
Manual White Balance. Up to three settings can be saved.
Only the white balance setting of still pictures captured with this camera can be
copied. The following images cannot be selected.
- Multi-exposure image
- Index image
- Still pictures captured from a movie
1
In Playback mode, display the image with the white
balance setting you want to copy.
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
6
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select K (Save
as Manual WB) and press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to select a different image.
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a number and press the
100-0105
Saves this image's White
Balance settings as a custom
4 button.
selection
The white balance setting of the selected
image is saved to Manual White Balance
Save as Manual 1
Save as Manual 2
Save as Manual 3
and the camera switches to Capture
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
mode. The white balance setting is K
(Manual).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
Correcting Images
The camera and lens properties can be automatically adjusted for when
taking pictures.
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusts the brightness and reduces the occurrence of overexposed and
underexposed areas.
D-Range Setting
Expands the dynamic range and enables a more ample gradation
expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence of
overexposed and underexposed areas.
6
1
Select [D-Range Setting] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [D-Range Setting] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Highlight
Correction] and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)
D-Range Setting
to select [Off] or [On] and press
the 4 button.
OFF
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
ON
Available sensitivity range is
currently ISO 100-12800
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shadow
Correction] and press the four-way controller (5).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
215
5
6
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Off], [Low],
[Medium] or [High] and press the
4 button.
D-Range Setting
OFF
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
When [Highlight Correction] is set to [On], the minimum sensitivity is set to ISO
200. When [3. Expanded Sensitivity] is set to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 1]
HDR Capture
6
Enables capturing images at high dynamic range. Takes three images
(-3EV underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and +3EV
overexposed) to create a single composite image with them.
• HDR Capture is not available in the following situations.
- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])
- when the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb) or M (Flash X-sync Speed)
• When HDR Capture is set, the following functions are not available.
- Drive modes other than 9 (Single Frame Shooting), g (Self-timer (12s)),
Z (Self-timer (2s)), h (Remote Control) or i (Remote Control (3s delay))
- Interval Shooting or Multi-exposure
- Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter or Cross Processing (The function
selected last is used.)
• During HDR Capture, multiple images are combined together to create a
single image, so it will take time to save an image.
1
Select [HDR Capture] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [HDR Capture] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Off], [Auto],
[Standard], [Strong 1], [Strong 2]
or [Strong 3].
HDR Capture
HDR
OFF
HDR
AUTO
HDR Capture
Auto Align
HDR
HDR
HDR
HDR
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
4
Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Auto Align] and use the
four-way controller (45) to
select P or O.
HDR Capture
HDR
AUTO
HDR Capture
Auto Align
MENU
6
[Shake Reduction] is fixed to l (Off). Use a tripod to prevent
camera shake when taking pictures. (default setting)
P
The Shake Reduction function operates according to the Shake
Reduction setting at that point. HDR Capture can be used without a
tripod.
O
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
217
• During HDR Capture, pressing the 3 button while an image is being
saved cancels the process and saves the image as a standard image.
• When both [Shake Reduction] and [Auto Align] are set to on, be careful of the
following points.
- Make sure to hold the camera firmly so that the composition of the picture
does not change while the three images are taken. If there is a great
difference of the composition between three images, [Auto Align] may not
be possible.
- Images taken with HDR Capture are susceptible to camera shake and blur.
Be sure to set a higher shutter speed and a higher ISO sensitivity.
- When the exposure mode is set to e (Hyper-program), [Program Line] is
set to l (Hi-speed Priority).
- When the ISO sensitivity is set to AUTO, the sensitivity can be raised more
easily than normal.
- [Auto Align] may not be possible for lenses that have a focal length
exceeding 100 mm.
- When the entire subject is checkered or has a uniform surface, [Auto Align]
may not be possible.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
Lens Correction
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due to
lens properties.
Distortion
Distortion is the phenomenon in which the center of the image appears
inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched
(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using a
zoom lens or a small diameter lens, and straight walls or the horizon in
the image appear curved.
6
Pincushion distortion
Barrel distortion
Lateral chromatic aberration
Lateral chromatic aberration is the phenomenon in which the
magnification of the image varies according to the colors (wavelengths
of light) when a picture was taken, and may cause a blurred image.
Lateral chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
219
• Corrections can only be made when using DA, DA L, D FA or some FA lenses
attached.
• [Distortion Correction] is disabled when using a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm.
• The Lens Correction function is disabled when using an accessory such as a
close-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and the
lens.
• When the Lens Correction function is activated, it may take longer to display
Instant Review and the shooting speed for continuous shooting may be
slower.
• The effect of the Lens Correction function may be barely noticeable in some
cases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.
1
Select [Lens Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Lens Correction] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Distortion
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj].
6
Press the four-way controller (5)
Lens Correction
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select [OFF] or [ON].
OFF
Distortion Correction
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
ON
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
4
5
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or
[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220
Adjusting the Composition
Adjusts the Shake Reduction unit in the X-Y direction or rotation direction
for a better composition position and a more level camera. Use this when
you want to adjust the composition, such as when using a tripod.
1
Select [Composition Adjust.] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Composition Adjust.] screen appears.
2
Select [Start Adjustment] and
press the 4 button.
Composition Adjust.
Start Adjustment
Recall Previous Position
To start adjusting the composition from
the previous position, use the four-way
Please note: depending on the
controller (23) to select [Recall
lens, adjusting the composition
Previous Position] and use the four-way
may cause vignetting
OK
MENU
OK
controller (45) to switch to O.
6
Live View is displayed and the
composition can be adjusted.
3
Adjust the composition.
0
0
0
The amount of compensation (the
number of steps) is displayed at the top
right of the screen.
Adjust the composition ooff
the image
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Available operations
Four-way controller
Moves the composition up, down, left or right.
(2345)
Adjust up to 24 steps (approximately ±1.5 mm) on
the image sensor.
Rear e-dial (S)
Adjusts the level of the composition when the
amount of adjustment is less than 16 steps (±1.0
mm) up or down, or to the left or right. Up to 8
steps (approximately ±1°) can be adjusted.
| button
Resets the adjustment value.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
221
4
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to normal Live View and is ready to take a picture.
• The saved adjustment value is reset when Live View is ended.
• When using the composition adjustment function frequently, you can assign
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222
Setting the Image Finishing Tone
Setting Custom Image
You can set the image finishing tone before shooting. Select from the
following nine modes for the image finishing tone: Bright (default setting),
Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach Bypass, Reversal
Film and Monochrome. You can adjust the following parameters.
Parameter
Saturation
Setting
Setting Values
-4 to +4
Sets the color saturation.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] or
[Monochrome] is selected.
Sets the color.
• Not available when [Bleach Bypass],
[Reversal Film] or [Monochrome] is
selected.
Hue
-4 to +4
Changes the brightness of the image.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] is
selected.
6
High/Low
Key Adj
-4 to +4
-4 to +4
Sets the image contrast.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] is
selected.
Contrast
Sets the sharpness of the image outlines.
You can switch to [Fine Sharpness] or
[Extra Sharpness], which makes image
outlines even thinner and sharper. (Not
available when the exposure mode is set
to C (Movie).)
Sharpness
-4 to +4
Changes the contrast to appear as if a
B&W color filter was used. Set the filter
color.
• Available only when [Monochrome] is
selected.
None/Green/Yellow/
Orange/Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Infrared
Filter
Filter Effect
Toning
Sets a color tone for [Bleach Bypass].
Sets the level for cold tone adjustment
(- direction) and warm tone adjustment
(+ direction) for [Monochrome].
• Available only when [Bleach Bypass] or
[Monochrome] is selected.
Bleach Bypass: Off/
Green/Yellow/Orange/
Red/Magenta/Purple/
Blue/Cyan
Monochrome: -4 to +4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
223
Image finishing tone is fixed to [Bright] and the parameters cannot be changed
in the following conditions.
- when the exposure mode is set to B (Green)
- when Cross Processing is set
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in Capture mode.
The screen to select a custom image appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the
background.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image finishing tone.
Bright
R
M
B
Y
G
C
AE.L
EX
F
OK
OK
MENU
Cancel
Check
6
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose a parameter you want
to change.
Portrait
R
M
Y
B
G
C
AE.L
EX
F
OK
MENU
Cancel
Check
OK
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the setting.
The background image changes according to the settings.
You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
Available operations
Front e-dial (R)
Switches between enabling and disabling contrast
settings.
Rear e-dial (S)
Switches between [Sharpness], [Fine Sharpness]
and [Extra Sharpness]. When set to [Fine
Sharpness] or [Extra Sharpness], image outlines
can be captured with more detail.
| button
Resets the set value.
Main switch (|)
Uses Digital Preview to preview the background
image with the setting applied. (Not available during
Live View.)
L button
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and
press the 4 button. (Not available during Live
View.)
5
Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
225
Setting Cross Processing
Cross processing is the procedure of deliberately processing a film in the
wrong type of chemicals to create an image with different colors and
contrast. This camera features digital cross processing, which is done
internally.
• When Cross Processing is set, the file format is fixed to [JPEG] and cannot
be changed. You cannot use Cross Processing when the file format is set to
[RAW] or [RAW+].
• When Cross Processing is set, the following functions and operation are not
available.
- Multi-exposure
- Extended Bracketing or HDR Capture (The function selected last is used.)
- Changing the settings of White Balance and Custom Image
1
Select [Cross Processing] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
6
When the exposure mode is set to C (Movie), select from [Movie] in the
The [Cross Processing] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select an item and press
Cross Processing
OFF
Cross Processing
1
Save Settings
2
the 4 button.
3
1
Select from [Off], [Preset 1-3], [Random]
and [Favorite 1-3].
2
3
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
Saving the Cross Processing Setting of a Captured Image
The outcome of cross processing varies each time a picture is taken. If you
are able to take a cross processed image that you like, you can save the
Cross Processing settings used in that image. A total of 3 Cross
Processing settings can be saved for still pictures and movies.
To save Cross Processing setting for movies, set from [Movie] in the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu with the mode dial set to C (Movie).
1
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Save Settings] in
four-way controller (5).
Cross Processing
OFF
Cross Processing
Save Settings
The camera will search for cross
processed images starting from the most
recent image taken. (An hourglass icon is
displayed while searching.) When across
MENU
6
processed image is found, the screen to save the settings appears.
If there are no cross processed images, the message [No cross
processed image] appears.
2
Turn the front e-dial (R) to
select a cross processed image.
1
100-0001
Saves tthis image's Cross
Processinng settings
Save as Favorite 1
Save as Favorite 2
Save as Favorite 3
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as
Favorite 1], [Save as Favorite 2] or [Save as Favorite 3] and
press the 4 button.
The setting of the selected image is saved to [Favorite 1 - 3].
Press the 3 button twice to finish saving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
227
Storing Frequently Used Settings
You can save the current camera settings in the A mode and easily
retrieve them.
The following settings can be stored.
• Exposure Mode (other than B and C)
• High-ISO NR
• Drive Mode
• Slow Shutter Speed NR
•
Flash Mode/Flash Exposure Compensation • D-Range Setting
• White Balance
• HDR Capture
• Custom Image
• Cross Processing
• Digital Filter
• Sensitivity/ISO AUTO Setting
• EV compensation value
• Program Line
• Exposure Bracketing
• Shake Reduction/
Horizon Correction
•
Extended Bracketing (Bracketing Amount/Type)
• JPEG Recorded Pixels
• JPEG Quality
• Lens Correction
• Color Space
6
• File Format
• E-Dial Programming/
Button Customization
• RAW File Format
• AUTO AF Point Setting
• [A Custom Setting 1-4]
menu settings
The A mode cannot be set when the mode dial is set to B (Green) or C
(Movie) mode.
Saving the Settings
Saves the settings to A. Up to five different settings can be saved.
1
Make the necessary settings.
2
Select [Save USER Mode] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Save USER Mode] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
3
4
5
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Save Settings]
and press the four-way controller
(5).
Save USER Mode
Save Settings
Rename USER Mode
Check Saved Settings
Reset USER Mode
The [Save Settings] screen appears.
MENU
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [A1] to [A5]
and press the four-way controller
(5).
Save Settings
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
1
2
3
4
5
USER1
USER2
USER3
USER4
USER5
MENU
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Save] and press the
4 button.
USER
1
Save Settings
6
Saves current settings in
USER1 custom mode
The settings are saved and the camera
returns to the [Save USER Mode] screen.
Save
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
Editing a Setting Name
You can change the name of the A mode in which you saved settings.
1
Select [Rename USER Mode] in Step 3 of “Saving the
The [Rename USER Mode] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [A1] to
[A5] and press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
229
3
Enter the text.
USER
1
Rename USER Mode
Text selection
cursor
Up to 18 single-byte
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols can be
entered.
Finish
USER1
Text input cursor
Delete One Character
OK
MENU
Cancel
Enter
Available operations
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
Moves the text input cursor.
Rear e-dial (S)
| button
Switches between upper and lower case letters.
4 button
Enters a character selected with the text selection
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.
i button
Deletes a character at the position of the text
input cursor.
6
4
5
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to
[Finish] and press the 4 button.
The name is changed.
Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to change the names of other A modes.
Press the 3 button.
Checking the Saved USER Settings
1
Select [Check Saved Settings] in Step 3 of “Saving the
The [Check Saved Settings] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [A1] to
[A5] and press the four-way controller (5).
The current settings saved in the selected A mode are displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
3
Press the 4 button.
USER
1
USER1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2.0x5
200-800
P
ISO
AUTO
The camera returns to the [Save USER
Mode] screen.
ISO
NR
AUTO
ON
AWB
11
G1 A1
NR
WB
ON
-
+1.0
0.5
BA
1
1
JPEG 16M
MENU
AdobeRGB
OK
OK
Using Saved USER Settings
You can easily retrieve saved settings.
1
Set the mode dial to A.
The A mode guide appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) or the rear e-dial (S) to
select [A1] to [A5].
USER
1
USER1
6
P
Use the four-way controller (23) to
check the saved settings.
RAW RAW
P
Tv
Av
AF Cancel AF
The saved settings are retrieved.
09/09/2010
10:30AM
3
Change the settings as
necessary.
1
2
3
4
P
Sv
Tv
Av
USER Mode
Exposure Mode
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels TAv
JPEG Quality
The exposure mode can be changed in
[Exposure Mode] of the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu.
M
B
X
AUTO AF Point Setting
Lens Correction
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
231
4
Take a picture.
• The A mode guide appears for 30 seconds regardless of the [Guide
Display] setting in the [R Set-up 1] menu.
• [A1] to [A5] can also be selected
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
from [USER Mode] in the [A Rec. Mode
1] menu.
USER
1
USER Mode
Exposure Mode
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AUTO AF Point Setting
Lens Correction
USER
2
• [USER Mode] and [Exposure Mode] are
displayed in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu
only when the mode dial is set to A.
• The settings changed in Step 3 are not
saved as A mode settings. When the
camera is turned off, settings return to the
original saved settings.
USER
USER
USER
11
3
4
5
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Changing the Settings
Changes the settings saved in A1 to A5.
6
1
Perform Steps 1 to 3 of “Using Saved USER Settings”
2
The settings are changed and resaved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
Resetting to Default Settings
Resets the settings saved in A1 to A5 to the default settings.
1
Select [Reset USER Mode] in Step 3 of “Saving the
The [Reset USER Mode] screen appears.
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [A1] to
[A5] and press the four-way controller (5).
Press the four-way controller (2)
USER
1
Reset USER Mode
to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
Resets USER1 custom mode
to default settings and name
The A mode settings return to the
default values.
Reset
Cancel
6
OK
MENU
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
Playback Functions Operation
Make settings related to playing back images in the playback mode palette
or [Q Playback] menu.
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items
Press the four-way controller (3) in
Playback mode to display the playback
mode palette.
You can display the playback mode palette
even when a movie is paused.
Image Rotation
7
Rotates captured images.
Useful for image playback on
TV and other display devices
OK
MENU
Exit
OK
Item
Function
Page
s
Image Rotation
Rotates images.
Changes the color tone of images, adds
softening and slimming effects, or
adjusts the brightness.
D
Digital Filter
Changes the number of recorded pixels
and quality level of the captured image
and saves it as a new file.
n Resize
Cuts out only the desired area of the
picture and saves it as a new image.
o Cropping
u Slideshow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
235
Item
Function
Page
You can copy the white balance setting
of a captured image and save it as
Manual White Balance.
K Save as Manual WB
h RAW Development
Joins a number of images together and
p Index
creates a new image with them.
g Image Comparison
Displays two images side-by-side.
[ Movie Editing
Protects images from being accidentally
erased.
Z Protect
r
DPOF
Sets the DPOF settings.
*1 This cannot be performed when a movie is displayed.
*2 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.
*3 This can be performed only when a movie is displayed.
Playback Menu Setting Items
You can perform the following settings in the
[Q Playback] menu.
7
Press the 3 button in Playback mode to
display the [Q Playback 1] menu.
Menu
Item
Slideshow
Function
Page
Plays back the images one after another.
in the slideshow.
Sets the initial magnification when
enlarging images.
Quick Zoom
Q1
Sets whether or not to display the Bright/
Bright/Dark Area
Dark Area warning during playback.
Sets whether to rotate images shot with the
camera held vertically when playing back.
Auto Image Rotation
Delete All Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
Setting the Playback Display Method
You can set the initial magnification when enlarging images, whether to
display the Bright/Dark Area warning, and whether to automatically rotate
images that are shot with the camera held vertically in Playback mode.
1
Select [Quick Zoom] in the [Q Playback 1] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the magnification and
1
Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Off
X2
press the 4 button.
Auto Image Rotation X4
Select from [Off] (default setting), [×2],
[×4], [×8], [×16] or [×32].
Delete All Images
X8
X16
X32
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Bright/Dark Area] and
use the four-way controller (45)
to select O or P.
1
Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
Delete All Images
Off
7
MENU
Exit
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Image
Rotation] and use the four-way controller (45) to select
O or P.
During playback, the image is automatically rotated based on the
O
P
The image is not automatically rotated during playback.
5
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
237
Enlarging Images
Images can be magnified up to 32 times in Playback mode.
1
Use the four-way controller (45
to select an image in Playback
mode.
)
100-0001
1/2000 F5.6
JPEG
ISO 200
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the
right (toward y).
100-0001
The image enlarges at each click (1.2 times
to 32 times).
x20
7
Available operations
Four-way controller (2345)
Moves the area to enlarge.
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y) Enlarges the image (up to 32 times).
/m button
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f) Reduces the image (up to 1.2 times*).
/| button
4 button
Returns to the original size.
Front e-dial (R)
Retains the magnification and the
position of the magnified area and
shows the previous/next image.
M button
Switches information display on/off.
*The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) is 1.2 times. You can
• You can enlarge the image by following the same procedure during Instant
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of
0.675 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click
starts at 1.0 times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238
Displaying Multiple Images
Multi-image Display Screen
You can display 4, 9, 16, 36 or 81 thumbnail images on the monitor at the
same time. The default setting is nine image-display.
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the
left (toward f) in Playback
mode.
The multi-image display screen
appears.
Selection frame
Up to nine thumbnail images are
displayed at once.
7
INFO
100-0001
Scroll bar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
239
Available operations
Four-way controller
Moves the selection frame.
(2345)
M button
Displays the [Multi-img Display Setting]
screen. Use the four-way controller (45) to
select the number of images to display at the
same time.
Multi-img Display Setting
Display Type
OK
MENU
INFO
Cancel
OK
(Display Type cannot be selected when
i button
Selects multiple images and deletes them.
2
Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.
7
Icons such as C and ? are not displayed with thumbnail images for 81-image
display.
Displaying Images by Folder
Images will be grouped and displayed by folder in which they are saved.
1
In the multi-image display
screen, turn the rear e-dial (S)
to the left (toward f) again.
The folder display screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240
2
3
Select the folder you want to
display.
12345
102
100
103
101
104
The number of images saved in the
selected folder appears at the top right of
the screen.
105
_
100 0105
Available operations
Four-way controller Moves the selection frame.
(2345)
i button
Deletes the selected folder and all the images in it. (p.252)
Press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen for the selected folder appears.
Displaying Images by the Shooting Date
(Calendar Display)
7
Images will be grouped and displayed by the shooting date.
1
In the multi-image display
screen, press the M button.
The [Multi-img Display Setting] screen
appears.
2
Press the M button again.
Multi-img Display Setting
Display Type
OK
MENU
INFO
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
241
The calendar display screen appears.
Number of images shot on this date
Only the dates when pictures were taken
are displayed.
2/5
2010.
WED
FRI
9
22
24
27
MON
2010.10
THU
SUN
WED
SAT
7
10
13
16
INFO
Delete
Shooting
Thumbnail
Available operations
Four-way controller (23) Selects a shooting date.
Four-way controller (45) Selects an image taken on the selected
shooting date.
Rear e-dial (S) to the
Displays the selected image. Turn to the left
right (y)
(f) to return to the calendar display.
M button
The camera returns to the multi-image display
screen.
i button
Deletes selected images.
3
Press the 4 button.
7
A full screen display of the selected image appears.
Comparing Images
You can display two images side-by-side.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select g (Image
Comparison) and press the 4 button.
The last image displayed will be displayed twice side-by-side.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
3
Select two images you want to
compare using the e-dials and
compare them at left and right.
100-0001
x2
100-0001
x2
OK
MENU
Available operations
4 button
Moves the selection frame to the right image,
both images, and left image each time the
button is pressed.
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the area to enlarge. When the selection
frame is placed on both images, you can
manipulate both images at the same time.
| button
Returns a position of the enlarged area to the
center.
Front e-dial (R)
When the selection frame is placed on the left
or right image, the previous or next image is
displayed.
Rear e-dial (S)
Enlarges or reduces the image. When the
selection frame is placed on both images, you
can manipulate both images at the same time.
7
M button
Switches information display On/Off.
i button
When the selection frame is placed on the left
or right image, the selected image is deleted.
4
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the normal playback mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
243
Joining Multiple Images (Index)
Join a number of images together and display them as an index print. You
can also save the displayed index print as a new image. You can select
the images to include in the index print or have them randomly-arranged.
This function is not available for movies.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select p (Index)
and press the 4 button.
The [Index] screen appears.
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a layout and press the
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
4 button.
7
Youcanselect
o
(Thumbnail),
(Random2),
(Bubble).
p
(Square),
q
s
(Random1),
(Random3) or
r
p
Create an index image
Images are displayed according to the file
number (from the smallest number) for
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
o, and are displayed in random order for other layouts.
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Images] and
press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)
Index
to select the number of images
Layout
12
24
36
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
and press the 4 button.
You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.
When the number of saved images is smaller
than the number selected, empty spaces will
Create an index image
appear when [Layout] is set to
o
and some
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
images may be duplicated for other layouts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Backgrnd.]
and press the four-way controller (5).
8
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the background color
Index
Layout
12
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
and press the 4 button.
You can select a white or black
background.
Create an index image
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Selection] and
press the four-way controller (5).
10 Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a type of image
selection and press the 4
button.
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
12
Create an index image
7
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Picks images automatically from all of the images
saved.
u
w
All images
Manual
Individually select images you want to include in
the index. Continue by selecting [Select image(s)]
and select the individual images.
Picks images automatically from the folder
selected. Continue by selecting [Select a folder]
and select the folder.
x
Folder name
11 Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Create an index image]
and press the 4 button.
Index
Layout
Images
Backgrnd.
Selection
12
The index image is created and a
confirmation screen appears.
Create an index image
OK
MENU
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
245
12 Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save] or [Reshuffle]
and press the 4 button.
Save
Reshuffle
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
Save
The index image is saved as a P and C file.
Reselects the images to be included in the index and
displays a new index image. However, if [Thumbnail] is
selected for [Layout], this item is not displayed.
Reshuffle
After the index image is saved, the camera returns to Playback mode
and the index image is displayed.
Processing may take a while when creating an index image.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246
Playing Back Images Continuously
You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card
successively in the slideshow.
Setting the Slideshow Display
Sets how images will be displayed during the Slideshow.
1
Select [Slideshow] in the [Q Playback 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The screen to make the slideshow settings appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select an item you want
Slideshow starts
to change.
Start
Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
3sec.
The following items can be changed.
7
OK
MENU
OK
Item
Interval
Description
Setting
Select an image display
interval.
3sec. (default setting)/
5sec./10sec./30sec.
Screen
Effect
Select a transition effect when Off (default setting)/Fade/
the next image is displayed.
Wipe/Stripe
Set whether to start the
slideshow again from the
beginning after the last image is
displayed.
Repeat
Playback
P (default setting)/O
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
247
3
1
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to change the setting and
press the 4 button.
Start
Interval
3sec.
5sec.
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
10sec.
30sec.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Starting the Slideshow
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the playback mode palette
and press the 4 button.
The start screen is displayed and the
slideshow begins.
Start
OK
7
Available operations
4 button
Pauses playback. Press again to resume
playback.
Four-way controller (4)
Four-way controller (5)
Four-way controller (3)
Shows the previous image.
Shows the next image.
Stops playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
2
Stop the slideshow.
Slideshow ends when one of the following operations is performed
during playback or pause.
- the shutter release button is pressed halfway or fully *2
*1 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to normal Playback mode.
*2 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to Capture mode.
For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image is
displayed after the set interval has elapsed. To play a movie during a
slideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After the
movie has finished playing, the slideshow will resume.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
249
Rotating Images
When pictures are taken with X held vertically, the vertical position
sensor activates and rotation information is added to the image to enable
playback with the correct image orientation. You can change the rotation
information and save the image using the following procedure.
set to [Off], the image rotation information is not saved when shooting.
(On), an image with rotation information is automatically rotated during
playback.
You cannot change the image rotation information in the following conditions.
- when the image is protected
- when the image rotation information tag is not saved with the image
P (Off)
1
Select the image you want to rotate in Playback mode.
7
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Image
Rotation) and press the 4 button.
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail
images are displayed.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a desired
rotation direction and press the
4 button.
The image rotation information is saved.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250
Deleting Multiple Images
Deleting Selected Images
You can delete multiple images in the multi-image display at once.
Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted.
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the
left (toward f) in Playback
mode.
The multi-image display screen appears.
7
2
Press the i button.
The screen to select the images to delete
is displayed.
The screen temporarily changes to 36-
image display when [Multi-img Display
display.
INFO
100-0001
3
Select the images to delete.
OK
MENU
Delete
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
251
Available operations
Four-way controller
Moves the selection frame.
(2345)
4 button
Adds O and selects an image. Press again to
return to P. Protected images (Z) cannot be
selected.
Rear e-dial (S)
Displays a full screen display of the image
selected with the selection frame. When the
image is displayed full screen, press the four-way
controller (45) to display the previous or next
image.
4
5
Press the i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Select & Delete].
All selected images will
be deleted
Select&Delete
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
7
6
Press the 4 button.
The selected images are deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
Deleting a Folder
You can delete a selected folder and all the images in it.
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) two
clicks to the left (toward f) in
Playback mode.
The folder display screen appears.
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a folder to
delete and press the i button.
The delete folder confirmation screen
appears.
12345
102
100
103
101
104
105
_
100 0105
7
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Delete].
_
100 0105
All images in selected
folder will be deleted
Delete
Cancel
OK
OK
Press the 4 button.
The selected folder and all images in it are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the four-
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]
3image(s)
Protected images are found
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
images are also deleted.
Delete All
Leave All
OK
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
253
Deleting All Images
You can delete all saved images at once.
Deleted images cannot be restored.
1
Select [Delete All Images] in the [Q Playback 1] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Delete All Images].
All images will be deleted
from memory
Delete All Images
Cancel
OK
OK
7
3
Press the 4 button.
All images are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the four-
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
3image(s)
Protected images are found
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
images are also deleted.
Delete All
Leave All
OK
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254
Protecting Images from Deletion
(Protect)
You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card is
formatted.
Protecting a Single Image
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
Z (Protect) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the protection setting method is displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Single Image] and
7
press the 4 button.
Single Image
All Images
OK
MENU
OK
4
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select an image to
protect.
Press the four-way controller (2)
100-0105
to select [Protect].
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the
protection of the image.
Protect
Unprotect
OK
MENU
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
255
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The image is protected and the Y icon appears at the top right of the
screen.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to protect other images.
Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to Playback mode.
Protecting All Images
1
button.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Protect] and press the
Protects all images
4 button.
All images saved on the SD Memory Card
are protected.
7
Protect
Unprotect
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the
protection of all images.
OK
MENU
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
Connecting the Camera to an AV
Device
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video input
terminal or HDMI terminal and play back images.
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC
adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) is recommended. (p.53)
•
For an AV device with multiple video input terminals, check the operating manual of
the AV device, and select a suitable video input terminal for connecting the camera.
• You cannot output composite and HDMI video at the same time.
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera while the camera is connected
to the AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.
• If you want to view a movie on an external monitor while recording it, connect
the camera to an AV device with the mini HDMI terminal. You cannot output
a movie using the video input terminal while recording.
Connecting the Camera to a Video Input Terminal
Use the provided AV cable I-AVC7 to connect the camera to a device with
a video input terminal.
7
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the AV cable
toward the 2 mark on the camera, and connect the cable
to the PC/AV terminal.
3
Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video input
terminal on the AV device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
257
4
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information is
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo,
monaural sound is played back.
Selecting the Video Output Format
output format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the
country or region, images may fail to be played back with the set video
output format. If this happens, change the video output format setting.
1
Select [Video Out] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [NTSC] or [PAL] and
1
2
3
4
Brightness Level
0
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
HDMI Out
press the 4 button.
7
NTSC
PAL
USB Connection
Folder Name
MSC
Date
Create New Folder
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
Press the 3 button.
The video output format is set.
The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Setting
setting changes to the video output format for that city.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal
Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to a
device with an HDMI terminal.
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.
2
Open the terminal cover and connect the HDMI cable to
the mini HDMI terminal.
7
3
4
Connect the other end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI input
terminal on the AV device.
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in HDMI mode, and the camera information is
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
• The camera has a mini HDMI terminal (Type C). Use a commercially
available HDMI cable that matches your AV device.
• Nothing is displayed on the camera monitor during HDMI output.
• If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, the
sound is played back in stereo.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
259
Selecting the HDMI Output Format
Set the output signal format of the HDMI terminal.
1
Select [HDMI Out] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the HDMI output format.
1
2
3
4
Brightness Level
0
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
HDMI Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
NTSC
Auto
1080i
720p
The maximum size
corresponding to the AV
device and camera is
automatically selected.
(default setting)
Auto
480p
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
1080i
720p
480p
1920×1080i
1280×720p
720×480p
*1 This depends on the selected video output format; [480p] for NTSC and [576p]
(720×576p) for PAL.
7
3
4
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The HDMI output format is set.
• When the HDMI output format is set to [1080i] or [720p], the display of the AV
device may appear with a screen design that differs from that displayed on
the camera.
• The Bright/Dark Area warning is not displayed during Live View.
• When the exposure mode is set to C (Movie), the output format is fixed to
[480p] regardless of the HDMI output format setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262
Changing the Image Size
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the image, and
saves the image as a new file.
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and
Quality Level (Resize)
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the selected
image and saves it as a new image. The number of recorded pixels can be
reduced while still obtaining an image with good quality.
• Only JPEG files captured with this camera can be resized.
• You cannot select a larger resolution than that of the original image.
• Images already resized to S or Z with this camera cannot be resized.
1
Select an image to resize in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
n (Resize) and press the 4 button.
8
The screen to select the recorded pixels and quality level appears.
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select the desired image size.
You can select one of the image sizes
starting from one size smaller than that of
the original image. The selectable sizes
16M
10M
vary according to the original image size
and aspect ratio.
OK
MENU
OK
5
Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to select the quality level.
You can select Z, C, D or E.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
263
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
Saves the image as a new file
The resized image is saved as a new
image.
Save as
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)
Cuts out only the desired area of the selected image and saves it as a new
image.The aspect ratio can also be changed.
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be cropped.
• Images already resized to S or Z with this camera cannot be cropped.
1
Select an image to crop in Playback mode.
8
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select
o (Cropping) and press the 4 button.
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop
appears on the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264
4
Specify the size and position of
the area to crop by using
cropping frame.
MENU
OK
INFO
3:2
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)
Changes the size of the cropping frame.
Moves the cropping frame.
Four-way controller
(2345)
M button
Changes the aspect ratio. Select from [3:2], [4:3],
[16:9] or [1:1]. The image can also be rotated
from -45° to +45° in increments of 1°.
3:2
0°
Aspect Ratio
Image Rotation
MENU
| button
Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments.
| appears only when the cropping frame can
be rotated.
8
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
Saves the image as a new file
The cropped image is saved as a new
image.
Save as
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
265
Processing Images with Digital
Filters
You can edit captured images using digital filters.
The following filters are available.
Filter Name
Effect
Parameter
Shading Level: +1 to +3
Creates an image that looks
Toy Camera as though it was shot with a Blur: +1 to +3
toy camera.
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
Creates an image with the
look of an old photo.
Retro
Frame Composite: None/Thin/
Medium/Thick
High
Contrast
Enhances the contrast in
the image.
+1 to +5
Contrast: Low/Medium/High
Scratch Effect: OFF/ON
Creates an image that looks as
though it was drawn with a pencil.
Sketch Filter
Intensity: +1 to +3
Creates an image that looks
as though it was painted.
Water Color
Pastel
Saturation: OFF/Low/Medium/High
Creates an image that looks as
though it was drawn with a crayon.
Weak/Medium/Strong
Lessens the tone of theimage
Posterization to create an image that looks +1 to +5
as though it was hand-drawn.
8
In-Focus Plane: -3 to +3
In-Focus Width: Narrow/Middle/Wide
Blurs part of the image to
create a fake miniature
scene.
Miniature
In-Focus Plane Angle: Side/Vertical/
Positive Slope/Negative Slope
Blur: +1 to +3
Brightness: -8 to +8
Saturation: -3 to +3
Hue: -3 to +3
Base
Parameter
Adj
Adjusts the parameters to
create the desired image.
Contrast: -3 to +3
Sharpness: -3 to +3
Filter Effect: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/
Infrared Filter
Creates a monochrome
Monochrome image such as a black-and-
white photo.
Toning (B-A): 7 levels
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266
Filter Name
Color
Effect
Parameter
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/
Green/Yellow
Adds a color filter to the
image. Select from 18 filters
(6 colors × 3 tones).
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extracts two specific colors
and shoots the rest of the
image in black and white.
Extractable Range of Color 1: -2 to +2
Extract
Color
Extracted Color 2: Red/Magenta/
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2: -2 to +2
Soft Focus: +1 to +3
Creates an image with a
soft focus throughout the
image.
Soft
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
Shape: Cross/Star/Snow Crystal/
Heart/Musical Note
For taking pictures of night
scenes or lights reflected on
water with a special
sparkling look by adding
extra glitter to the highlights.
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°
Starburst
Fish-eye
Creates an image that looks
as though it was shot with a Weak/Medium/Strong
fish-eye lens.
Changes the horizontal and
-8 to +8
Slim
8
vertical ratio of images.
Creates animage that looks like
Weak/Medium/Strong
HDR
a high dynamic range image.
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow
Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
Custom
Filter
Customize and save a filter
to your own preferences.
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/
Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
267
Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be edited using the
Digital Filter.
Applying the Digital Filter
1
Select an image for applying the digital filter in Playback
mode.
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select D (Digital
Filter) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a filter appears.
4
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to select a filter and
100-0001
Toy Camera
press the 4 button.
After selecting a filter, you can check the
effect on the screen.
8
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to
select a different image.
OK
MENU
Exit
OK
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a parameter
and the four-way controller (45) to adjust the value.
100-0001
100-0001
Red
Slim
OK
OK
MENU
MENU
Color Filter
Slim Filter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Use filters in
Continue selecting filters?
combination] or [Save as].
Select [Use filters in combination] when
you want to apply additional filters to the
same image.
Use filters in combination
Save as
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
8
Press the 4 button.
If [Use filters in combination] was selected, the camera returns to Step 4.
If [Save as] was selected, the filter-processed image is saved as a new
image.
combined to the same image.
Recreating Filter Effects
8
Retrieves the setting of an image with filter effects and applies the same
filter effects to other images.
1
Select a filter-processed image in Playback mode.
2
3
Select D (Digital Filter) in the playback mode palette.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Recreating filter
effects] and press the 4
Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
button.
Searching for the original image
The history of the filter set for the selected
image appears.
OK
MENU
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
269
4
To check the parameter details,
press the M button.
100-0001
Reappliies folllowing digital filter
effectts from ppreviouus image
You can check the filter parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17. - -
18. - -
19. - -
20. - -
OK
MENU
INFO
Details
OK
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select an image for applying
the same filter effects and press
the 4 button.
100-0001
Performs ddigital filter
processinng to this image
You can only select an image that has not
been processed with a filter.
OK
MENU
OK
The save confirmation screen appears.
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
Saves the image as a new file
8
The filter-processed image is saved as a
new image.
Save as
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270
Searching for the Original Image
Searches for and displays the original image prior to digital filter
application.
1
Select [Searching for the original
image] in Step 3 on p.268 and
press the 4 button.
Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
The original image prior to digital filter
application is retrieved.
Searching for the original image
OK
MENU
OK
If the original image is no longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message
[Original image, prior to digital filter application, is not found] appears.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
271
Developing RAW Images
You can convert captured RAW files into JPEG or TIFF files.
Only RAW files captured with this camera can be edited. RAW files and JPEG
files captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.
Developing One RAW Image
1
Select a RAW image in Playback mode.
2
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select h (RAW
Development) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a development method is displayed.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Developing a Single
8
Image] and press the 4 button.
Developing a Single Image
Developing Multiple Images
OK
MENU
OK
The parameters recorded in the image
file appear.
16M
RAW
JPEG
File Format
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to
select a different image.
ISO
NR
To specify the parameters before
developing, refer to “Specifying the
sRGB
OK
MENU
100-0001
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272
5
6
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
RAW JPEG
Saves the image as a new file
The RAW image is developed and saved
as a new image.
Save as
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
7
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Continue] or [Exit].
Image developed and stored.
Continue developing?
Select [Continue] to edit other images.
Continue
Exit
OK
OK
8
Press the 4 button.
If you select [Continue] in Step 7, the screen for selecting the parameters
in Step 4 appears again.
8
Developing Multiple RAW Images
You can develop multiple RAW images with the same settings.
1
Select [Developing Multiple Images] in Step 4 on p.271 and
press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen appears.
Refer to p.238 for details on operations in the multi-image display screen.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the RAW
images to be developed and press the 4 button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
273
3
4
Press the L button.
The development confirmation screen
appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Develop images as
shot] or [Develop images with
modified settings].
Develop images as shot
Develop images with
modified settings
To change parameters, select [Develop
images with modified settings]. Refer to
details.
OK
MENU
OK
The screen to select a parameter appears.
5
Use the four-way controller
(2345) to set [File Format],
[Recorded Pixels] and [Quality
Level].
RAW
JPEG
JPEG
File Format
16M
8
You can select [JPEG] or [TIFF] for the file
format. If [TIFF] is selected, the
[Recorded Pixels] and [Quality Level]
settings are not available.
OK
MENU
OK
6
7
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
RAW JPEG
Selected images are saved
as new files
The selected RAW images are developed
and saved as new images.
Save as
Cancel
OK
MENU
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274
Specifying the Parameters
Specify the parameters for developing RAW images.
The following parameters can be changed.
Parameter
File Format
Value
Page
-
JPEG/TIFF
p (4928×3264)/J (3936×2624)/
P (3072×2048)/i (1728×1152)
Recorded Pixels
Z (Premium) / C (Best) / D
(Better) / E (Good)
Quality Level
Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/Vibrant/
Muted/Bleach Bypass/Reversal Film/
Monochrome
Custom Image
F (Auto)/G (Daylight)/H (Shade)/
^ (Cloudy)/JD (Fluorescent Light
Daylight Color)/JN (Fluorescent Light
Daylight White)/JW (Fluorescent Light
Cool White)/ JL (Fluorescent Light Warm
White)/I (Tungsten Light)/L (Flash)/
f/K (Manual)/K (Color Temperature)
White Balance
Sensitivity
-2.0 to +2.0
-
High-ISO NR
Auto/Off/Low/Medium/High
Off/Low/Medium/High
Off/On
Shadow Correction
Distortion Correction
8
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
Color Space
Off/On
sRGB/AdobeRGB
*1 This cannot be set when [File Format] is set to [TIFF]. (The setting is fixed to p.)
*2 This cannot be set for RAW files taken in Multi-exposure mode.
1
Press the four-way controller
choose the parameter you want
to change.
16M
RAW
JPEG
File Format
ISO
NR
sRGB
OK
MENU
100-0001
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
275
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the value.
Press the four-way controller (5) to display the setting screen for White
Balance and Custom Image.
3
4
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] and
press the 4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.
• You cannot save the background image and use Digital Preview with White
Balance and Custom Image.
• When the white balance is set to K (Manual), press the M button to
display the measuring screen.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278
How to Operate the Set-up Menu
Perform general settings related to the camera in the [R Set-up] menu.
Set-up Menu Setting Items
Perform the following settings in the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture/Playback mode and use the four-way
controller (45) to display the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Changes the language in which menus
and messages appear.
Language/u
Date Adjustment
Sets the date format and time.
Sets the display of the local date and time
of the specified city so they can be
displayed on the monitor in addition to the
present location when traveling overseas.
World Time
R1
Sets the text size of an item selected on
the respective menu screens.
Text Size
Beep
Switches the beep tone on/off.
Sets whether to display indicators on the
monitor.
Guide Display
9
Sets the display color of the status screen
and control panel.
Status Screen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
279
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Changes the brightness of the monitor.
Adjusts the color of the monitor.
Sets the output format when connecting
to an AV device with a video input
terminal.
Video Out
HDMI Out
Sets the HDMI output format when
terminal.
R2
Sets the USB connection mode when
USB Connection
Folder Name
connecting to a computer.
Sets the naming system of the folder for
storing images.
Creates a new folder on the SD Memory
Card.
Create New Folder
File Name
Sets the method used to assign file
names for images.
Copyright
Information
Sets the photographer and copyright
information embedded in Exif.
R3
Sets the time until the camera turns off
automatically.
Auto Power Off
Sets the battery to use when the optional
Select Battery
Reset
battery grip (D-BG4) is attached.
Resets all settings.
Maps out and corrects any defective
pixels in the CMOS sensor.
Pixel Mapping
Detects dust adhering to the CMOS
sensor.
9
Dust Alert
R4
Cleans the CMOS sensor using ultrasonic
vibrations.
Dust Removal
Locks the mirror in the up position for
cleaning the CMOS sensor with a blower.
Sensor Cleaning
Format
Formats an SD Memory Card.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280
[R Set-up 1] menu
[R Set-up 2] menu
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
English
Brightness Level
0
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
HDMI Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
NTSC
Auto
MSC
Date
Standard
3sec.
MENU
MENU
Exit
Exit
[R Set-up 3] menu
[R Set-up 4] menu
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
File Name
IMGP
1min.
Pixel Mapping
Dust Alert
Dust Removal
Sensor Cleaning
Format
Copyright Information
Auto Power Off
Select Battery
Reset
MENU
MENU
Exit
Exit
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
281
Formatting the SD Memory Card
Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused
or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.
Formatting deletes all the data saved on the SD Memory Card.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be
damaged and become unusable.
• Formatting deletes all data, either protected or unprotected. Be aware.
1
four-way controller (5).
The [Format] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Format].
Format
All data will be deleted
Format
Cancel
OK
OK
3
Press the 4 button.
Formatting starts.
9
When formatting is completed, the
screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu appears again.
Formatting
When an SD Memory Card is formatted, the volume label assigned to the card
is “K-5”. When the X is connected to a computer, the SD Memory Card is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282
Customizing Buttons and Dials
You can set the functions for when the |/Y button, = button or
Preview dial is operated, or when the shutter release button is pressed
halfway.
Setting the Function for the E-dials
For each exposure mode, you can set the functions for when the front and
rear e-dials or | button are operated.
1
Select [E-Dial Programming] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [E-Dial Programming 1] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select an exposure
mode.
1
2
E-Dial Programming
Tv
- -
Av
ISO
- -
P
P
- -
- -
- -
Sv
Tv
Av
TAv
Tv
- -
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
[E-Dial Programming 2] screen.
Av
Av
P
LINE
Tv
MENU
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).
9
The screen for the selected exposure mode appears.
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select a function.
E-Dial Programming
P
P
P
Tv
Av
Av
Tv
- -
P
SHIFT
P
P
LINE
LINE
P
SHIFT
You can perform the following settings for
each exposure mode.
- -
- -
- -
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
283
Exposure
Mode
R Front E-dial
S Rear E-dial
| Button
b
c
(Aperture)
}e
(Return to e)
(Shutter speed)
c
(Aperture)
b
}e
(Return to e)
(Shutter speed)
m
eSHIFT
(Program Shift)
eLINE
(Program Line)
e
(EV Compensation)
eSHIFT
(Program Shift)
m
eLINE
(Program Line)
(EV Compensation)
–
–
–
–
–
o
(Sensitivity)
o
(Sensitivity)
–
–
eSHIFT
(Program Shift)
o
(Sensitivity)
eLINE
(Program Line)
K
o
(Sensitivity)
eSHIFT
(Program Shift)
eLINE
(Program Line)
m
o
(Sensitivity)
–
(EV Compensation)
o
(Sensitivity)
m
–
(EV Compensation)
b
–
–
(Shutter speed)
b
–
–
(Shutter speed)
b
m
–
–
(Shutter speed)
(EV Compensation)
b
m
b
(EV Compensation)
(Shutter speed)
9
b
o
(Sensitivity)
o AUTO
o AUTO
(Shutter speed)
o
(Sensitivity)
b
(Shutter speed)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284
Exposure
Mode
R Front E-dial
S Rear E-dial
| Button
c
(Aperture)
–
–
–
–
–
c
(Aperture)
–
m
c
(Aperture)
(EV Compensation)
c
c
(Aperture)
m
(EV Compensation)
o
(Sensitivity)
c
(Aperture)
o AUTO
c
(Aperture)
o
(Sensitivity)
o AUTO
b
c
(Aperture)
(Shutter speed)
c
(Aperture)
b
(Shutter speed)
eLINE
L
/a
(Program Line)
bSHIFT
(Shutter speed shift)
cSHIFT
(Aperture shift)
–
–
c
(Aperture)
–
c
(Aperture)
–
–
–
–
p
o
(Sensitivity)
c
(Aperture)
9
c
(Aperture)
o
(Sensitivity)
c
(Aperture)
–
c
(Aperture)
–
o
(Sensitivity)
c
(Aperture)
M
c
o
(Aperture)
(Sensitivity)
cSHIFT
(Aperture shift)
–
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
285
Exposure
Mode
R Front E-dial
S Rear E-dial
| Button
c
(Aperture)
–
c
(Aperture)
–
m
c
(Aperture)
(EV Compensation)
C
c
m
(EV Compensation)
(Aperture)
cSHIFT
(Aperture shift)
–
5
6
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Setting the Function for the Buttons
You can set the functions for when the |/Y button, = button,
Preview dial (main switch |) is operated, or when the shutter release
button is pressed halfway.
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 5]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
9
The [Button Customization] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select a button to set a
function to and press the four-
Button Customization
RAW/Fx Button
AF Button
Preview Dial
way controller (5).
Shutter Button Half Press
The screen to set the function for the
selected button is displayed.
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286
3
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way
controller (23) to select a function.
The following functions can be assigned to each button.
Button
Setting
Function
Page
One Push File
Format
Temporarily changes the
file format.
Sets the Exposure
Bracketing.
Exposure Bracketing
Digital Preview
|/Y
button
Displays the Digital
Preview.
Displays the Electronic
Level on the monitor.
Electronic Level
Composition Adjust.
Enable AF
Displays the [Composition
Adjust.] screen.
The autofocus system
operates.
= button
Disables autofocus with the
shutter release button while
the button is pressed.
Cancel AF
Displays the Optical
Preview when the main
switch is turned to the
preview position (|).
Optical Preview
Preview
Dial
Displays the Digital Preview
when the main switch is
turned to the preview
position (|).
Digital Preview
Enable AF
Off
9
The autofocus system
operates.
The autofocus system does
not operate when the
shutter release button is
pressed halfway.
Shutter
release
button
-
pressed
halfway
Only during Live View, the
autofocus system does not
operate when the shutter
release button is pressed
halfway.
Off
(Live View only)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
287
4
5
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button three times.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and
Display Language
Setting the Beep
You can turn the camera operation beep on or off, or change its volume.
By default, all available items are set to O (On), and the volume level is
set to [3].
The following items can be set.
• In-focus
• AE-L (AE Lock operation sound)
• Self-timer
• Remote Control
• Mirror Up
• One Push File Format (operation sound when [One Push File Format]
is assigned to the |/Y button)
• Press OK for 1 sec. (operation sound when Change AF point is
enabled or disabled)
1
Select [Beep] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press the four-
way controller (5).
The [Beep 1] screen appears.
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to adjust the volume.
Select from six levels. When set to 0, you can turn all the beeps off.
9
Use the four-way controller
1
2
Beep
(23) to choose an item.
Volume
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
In-focus
AE-L
[Beep 2] screen.
Self-timer
Remote Control
Mirror Up
MENU
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
289
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Changing the Date and Time Display
You can change the initial date and time settings, and set their display
formats. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd] for the date
display format, and [12h] (12-hour display) or [24h] (24-hour display) for
the time display format.
Date Adjustment
24h
Date Format
Date
mm/dd / yy
01 / 01 / 2010
:
Time
00 00
Settings complete
Cancel
MENU
Setting the World Time
time of your present location.
Setting the destination in [World Time] enables you to display the local
date and time on the monitor when traveling overseas.
9
1
the four-way controller (5).
The [World Time] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select X (Destination) or W
World Time
Setting the Time
(Hometown) for [Setting the
Time].
Destination
:
16 00
London
Hometown
New York
This setting is reflected on the date and
time that appear in the guide display and
control panel.
:
10 00
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290
3
4
5
Press the four-way controller (3).
The selection frame moves to X (Destination setting).
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [X Destination] screen appears.
Use the four-way controller (45)
to select a destination city.
Destination
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the
region.
The location, time difference and current
time of the selected city appear.
London
DST
+06:00
16:00
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
6
7
Press the four-way controller (23) to select [DST].
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Select O if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).
8
9
Press the 4 button.
The settings are saved and the camera returns to the [World Time]
screen.
Press the 3 button twice.
9
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
a destination.
• Select W (Hometown) in Step 2 to set the city and DST setting.
• X appears in the guide display if [Setting the Time] is set to X (Destination).
• When you switch [Setting the Time] to X (Destination), the video output
(p.257) setting changes to the video output format for that city.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
291
List of World Time Cities
City
City
Region
North
America
Region
Africa/
West Asia
Honolulu
Dakar
Anchorage
Vancouver
San Francisco
Los Angeles
Calgary
Algiers
Johannesburg
Istanbul
Cairo
Jerusalem
Nairobi
Denver
Chicago
Miami
Jeddah
Tehran
Toronto
Dubai
New York
Halifax
Karachi
Kabul
Mexico City
Lima
Male
Central and
South
America
Delhi
Santiago
Caracas
Buenos Aires
Sao Paulo
Rio de Janeiro
Lisbon
Colombo
Kathmandu
Dacca
Yangon
Bangkok
Kuala Lumpur
Vientiane
Singapore
Phnom Penh
Ho chi Minh
Jakarta
East Asia
Europe
Madrid
London
Paris
Amsterdam
Milan
9
Rome
Hong Kong
Beijing
Copenhagen
Berlin
Shanghai
Manila
Prague
Stockholm
Budapest
Warsaw
Athens
Taipei
Seoul
Tokyo
Guam
Helsinki
Moscow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292
City
Region
Oceania
Perth
Adelaide
Sydney
Noumea
Wellington
Auckland
Pago Pago
Setting the Display Language
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed.
The camera supports the following languages: English, French, German,
Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish,
Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
293
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu
Display
Setting the Text Size
You can set the text size of an item selected on the respective menu
screens to [Standard] (normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).
1
2
3
4
(p.278).
English
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
Standard
Large
3sec.
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Setting the Guide Display Time
Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when
the camera is turned on or the exposure mode is changed. (p.24)
Select from [3 sec.] (default setting), [10 sec.], [30 sec.] and [Off].
1
2
3
4
English
Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
3sec.
10sec.
30sec.
Off
9
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294
Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed
Set the initial menu tab displayed on the monitor when the 3 button
is pressed.
1
Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [24. Save Menu Location] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Reset Menu Location]
or [Save Menu Location] and
24. Save Menu Location
1
2
Reset Menu Location
Save Menu Location
press the 4 button.
Pressing the menu button
accesses the last used
menu tab
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu ([A Rec. Mode 4]
Reset Menu
Location
menu when the exposure mode is set to C (Movie),
and [Q Playback 1] menu when in Playback mode)
is always displayed first. (default setting)
1
2
Save Menu
Location
The menu tab last selected is displayed first.
3
Press the 3 button.
9
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
295
Setting the Status Screen Display
You can set whether to display the status screen on the monitor and set
the display color of the status screen, control panel and playback mode
palette.
1
Select [Status Screen] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Status Screen] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
O
P
Displays the status screen. (default setting)
Does not display the status screen.
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Screen
Rotation] and use the four-way controller (45) to select
O or P.
If the camera is held vertically while measuring the brightness, the
status screen/control panel is displayed vertically. (default setting)
O
P
The status screen/control panel is always displayed horizontally.
Use the four-way controller
(23) to select [Display Color]
and use the four-way controller
(45) to select from six display
colors.
Status Screen
Enable
9
Auto Screen Rotation
Display Color
1
1/125
F
5.6
MENU
5
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296
Setting the Display for Instant Review
You can set the Instant Review display settings.
1
Select [Instant Review] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Instant Review] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (5)
and use the four-way controller
(23) to select a display time.
Instant Review
Display Time
Histogram
1sec.
3sec.
5sec.
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review Off
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
4
Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Histogram],
[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge Instant Review].
5
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
When [Enlarge Instant Review] is set to O (default setting), you can
9
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
297
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor
You can adjust the brightness of the monitor. Adjust the settings when the
monitor is hard to see.
1
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Brightness Level] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (45)
to adjust the brightness.
Brightness Level
+2
You can select from 15 brightness levels.
The value is reset to ±0 when the |
button is pressed.
OK
MENU
0
Cancel
OK
3
4
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor
You can adjust the color of the monitor.
1
Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [LCD Color Tuning] screen appears.
2
Adjust the color.
LCD Color Tuning
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.
G
B
A
M
0
0
OK
MENU
0
Cancel
OK
Available operations
Four-way controller (23) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G)
and magenta (M).
Four-way controller (45) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B)
and amber (A).
| button
Resets the adjustment value.
Front e-dial (R)
Displays a saved image in the background so
you can adjust the color while viewing the
image. This is useful for matching the color of
the monitor with that of a computer.
9
3
4
Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
299
Setting the Electronic Level Display
This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether the
camera is level, as indicated on the bar graph in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel and monitor. Select whether to display the bar graph.
1
Select [Electronic Level] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select O or P.
1
2
3
4 5
Movie
Live View
Electronic Level
Horizon Correction
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
Displays the bar graph of the
electronic level.
O
35mm
Does not display the bar graph of the
electronic level. (default setting)
P
MENU
Exit
3
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
The bar graph can be displayed on the monitor when the M button is
pressed in the control panel. When [Electronic Level] is assigned to the |/
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300
Setting the Folder/File Number
Changing the Naming System of the Folder
You can select a naming system of the folder for storing images.
The two digits of the month and day on which the picture was taken are
assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] is a
sequential number from 100 to 999. [MMDD] (month and day) appears
Date
setting)
Example) 101_0125: Folder for images taken on January 25th
The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].
Example) 101PENTX
PENTX
1
2
3
4
Brightness Level
0
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
HDMI Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
NTSC
Auto
MSC
Date
PENTX
Create New Folder
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Creating New Folders
9
Creates a new folder on an SD Memory Card. A folder is created with the
number following the number of the folder currently being used.
1
Select [Create New Folder] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Create New Folder] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
301
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Create folder] and
press the 4 button.
Create New Folder
Creates a new storage folder
with the following name:
101 PENTX
A folder with a new number is created.
Create folder
Cancel
OK
OK
Only one folder can be created using this operation. Multiple empty folders
cannot be created consecutively.
Selecting the File Number Setting
You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when
Mode 4] menu.
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved and
O
P
subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a new
folder is created.
The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001 each
time a new folder is created for saving images.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracketing shooting,
images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the
number of images exceeds 500.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302
Setting the File Name
You can change the file names of images.
The default naming conventions are as follows depending on the [Color
“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential
Color Space
sRGB
File Name
IMGPxxxx.JPG
_IGPxxxx.JPG
AdobeRGB
For sRGB, you can change [IMGP] (4 characters) to the desired
characters.
For AdobeRGB, of the 4 characters you selected, the first 3 are assigned
in place of [IGP].
Example: When set to [ABCDxxxx.JPG], files are named
[_ABCxxxx.JPG] for AdobeRGB.
1
Select [File Name] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [File Name] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Change] and press the
four-way controller (5).
File Name
I
M G P xxxx.jpg
G P xxxx.jpg
s
RGB
9
_
I
AdobeRGB
The text-entry screen appears.
Change
Reset File Name
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
303
3
Change the text.
File Name
Text selection
cursor
Finish
Text input cursor
OK
MENU
Cancel
Enter
Available operations
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
Moves the text input cursor.
Rear e-dial (S)
4 button
Enters a character selected with the text selection
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.
4
5
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to
[Finish] and press the 4 button.
The file name is changed.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Resetting the File Name
You can reset a changed file name to its default setting.
9
1
four-way controller (5).
The [Reset File Name] screen appears.
2
3
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Reset] and
press the 4 button.
The file name is reset.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304
Selecting the Power Settings
Setting the Auto Power Off Function
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain
length of time. Select from [1min.] (default setting), [3min.], [5min.],
[10min.], [30min.] or [Off].
1
2
3
4
File Name
IMGP
Copyright Information 1min.
Auto Power Off
Select Battery
Reset
3min.
5min.
10min.
30min.
Off
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
• The Auto Power Off function does not work in the following situations.
- when the Live View image is displayed
- when the slideshow is played back
- when the camera is connected to a computer with an USB cable
• If the camera turns off after the set length of time, perform one of the following
operations to reactivate it.
- Turn on the camera again.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
- Press the Q button, 3 button or M button.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
305
Selecting a Battery
You can set the battery priority to the camera or the battery grip when the
1
Select [Select Battery] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Select Battery] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller
(5).
Select Battery
Auto Select
MENU
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select a battery to be
prioritized and press the 4
button.
Select Battery
Auto Select
Body First
Grip First
Priority is given to the
battery with the most
remaining power. (default
setting)
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Auto Select
9
Body First/
Grip First
Priority is given to the
selected battery.
When using AA batteries in the
battery grip, use the four-way
controller (23) to select [AA
Battery Type] and press the four-
way controller (5).
Select Battery
Auto Select
AA Battery Type
AUTO
MENU
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select the AA battery type and
press the 4 button.
Select Battery
AUTO
AA Battery Type
AUTO
Auto-detect
Ni-MH
AL
Nickel-Metal Hydride
Alkaline
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera will
automatically detect the type of batteries
being used.
Li
Lithium
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• If batteries are inserted into both the body and grip, the battery levels of both
are checked when the power is turned on. Regardless of the [Select Battery]
setting, both batteries are slightly used.
• When the currently selected battery runs out as a result of the check, the
message [Battery depleted] appears on the monitor. Turn the camera off and
on again, and the camera will switch to the remaining battery.
• You can check the battery usage condition on the status screen and LCD
panel. (p.52)
When the type of AA batteries inserted in the battery grip differs from the
battery type setting in Step 5, the battery level will not be correctly determined.
Please set the correct battery type. Usually, there is no problem using [Auto-
detect]. However in low temperatures and when using batteries that were
stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate battery type so the camera
can correctly determine the remaining battery level.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
307
Setting the Photographer Information
The camera type, shooting conditions and other information are
automatically embedded in captured images in the Exif data format. You
can embed photographer information in this Exif.
the Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright Information] in the [R Set-up 3] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller
(45) to select O or P.
Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Embeds copyright information in the
Exif.
O
Copyright Holder
Does not embed copyright
P
information in the Exif. (default
setting)
MENU
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Photographer]
and press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308
4
Enter the text.
Photographer
Text selection
cursor
Up to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols can be
entered.
Finish
Text input cursor
Delete One Character
OK
MENU
Cancel
Enter
Available operations
Four-way controller
(2345)
Moves the text selection cursor.
Moves the text input cursor.
Rear e-dial (S)
| button
Switches between upper and lower case
letters.
4 button
Enters a character selected with the text
selection cursor at the position of the text input
cursor.
i button
Deletes a character at the position of the text
input cursor.
5
After entering the text, move the
text selection cursor to [Finish]
and press the 4 button.
Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder
MENU
The camera returns to the [Copyright
Information] screen.
9
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Copyright
Holder] and enter the text in the same way as
[Photographer].
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
309
Setting the DPOF Settings
You can order conventional photograph prints by taking the SD Memory
Card with recorded images to a store for printing.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings allow you to specify the
number of copies and whether to imprint the date.
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images.
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select r (DPOF)
and press the 4 button.
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.
3
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [Single Image] or [All
Images] and press the 4
Single Image
button.
All Images
OK
MENU
OK
9
4
When [Single Image] is selected
in Step 3, use the four-way
controller (45) to select an
image to set DPOF settings.
100-0105
Copies
00
Date
OK
MENU
Date
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number of
copies.
You can set up to 99 copies.
K appears at the top right of the screen for images with DPOF settings.
To cancel the DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00].
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to
100-0105
select O or P for printing the
date.
Copies
01
Date
O
P
The date will be printed.
The date will not be
printed.
OK
MENU
Date
OK
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to make DPOF
settings for other images (up to 999).
7
Press the 4 button.
The DPOF settings for the selected image is saved and the camera
returns to Playback mode.
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab,
the date may not be printed on the pictures even if the date for DPOF setting
is set to O.
• The number of copies specified in the All Images setting applies to all the
images, and that specified in the Single Image setting is canceled. Before
printing, check that the specified number is correct.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
311
Correcting Defective Pixels in the
CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)
Pixel Mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting defective pixels
in the CMOS sensor.
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
Pixel Mapping
to select [Pixel Mapping] and
Checks the image sensor
press the 4 button.
and corrects defective pixels
Defective pixels are mapped and
corrected, and the screen that was
displayed before selecting the menu
Pixel Mapping
Cancel
OK
OK
appears again.
When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power
remaining to activate Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC
adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) or change to the battery with ample power
remaining.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312
Selecting Settings to Save in the
Camera (Memory)
You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned
off. The following function settings can be saved.
Default
Setting
Default
Setting
Function
Flash Mode
Function
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Cross Processing
Extended Bracketing
Digital Filter
P
O
P
Drive Mode
White Balance
Custom Image
Sensitivity
HDR Capture
P
Playback Info Display
File No.
O
O
EV Compensation
Flash Exposure Comp.
[Memory] cannot be selected when the mode dial is set to A.
1
Select [Memory] in the [A Rec. Mode 5] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Memory 1] screen appears.
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to choose an item.
1
2
Memory
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Custom Image
Sensitivity
9
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the
[Memory 2] screen.
EV Compensation
Flash Exposure Comp.
MENU
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Settings are saved even when the camera is turned
off.
O
Settings are cleared and returned to their default
values when the camera is turned off.
P
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
313
4
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
• Set [File No.] to O (On) to continue the sequential numbering for the file
name even if a new folder is created. Refer to “Selecting the File Number
default values.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316
Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer
The captured still pictures and movies can be transferred to a computer by
connecting the X using a USB cable and can be managed using the
provided software.
We recommend the following system requirements to connect your
camera to a computer or to use the software “PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4” included on the CD-ROM (S-SW110).
Windows
Windows XP (SP3 or later), Windows Vista, or Windows 7 (can
be run as a 32-bit application on any x64 Edition of Windows.)
OS
Pentium D 3.0 GHz equivalent or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo
processor 2.0 GHz equivalent or higher recommended)
CPU
RAM
2.0 GB or more (3.0 GB or more recommended)
Free Disk Space 1 GB or more (8 GB or more recommended)
1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended)
with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)
Monitor
Others
USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment
Macintosh
OS
Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5, or 10.6
PowerPC G5 Dual-core 2.0 GHz or higher (Intel Core 2 Duo
processor 2.0 GHz or higher recommended. Universal Binary
format.)
CPU
RAM
2.0 GB minimum (4.0 GB or more recommended)
Free Disk Space 1 GB minimum (8 GB or more recommended)
10
1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended)
Monitor
Others
with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)
USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
317
Saving Images on Your Computer
Setting the USB Connection Mode
Set the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer via the
provided USB cable (I-USB7). The default setting is [MSC].
1
Select [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
2
Use the four-way controller (23)
to select [MSC] or [PTP].
1
2
4
3
Brightness Level
0
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
HDMI Out
USB Connection
Folder Name
NTSC
Auto
MSC
PTP
Create New Folder
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
3
4
Press the 4 button.
The setting is changed.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318
MSC and PTP
MSC (Mass Storage Class)
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to
the computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard
for controlling USB devices with this driver.
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage
Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without
installing a dedicated driver.
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital
cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP
without installing a device driver.
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the X
to your computer.
Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera
and Your Computer
1
Turn your computer on.
2
Turn off your camera and use the provided USB cable to
connect your camera and your computer.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
319
3
Turn your camera on.
The camera is recognized as a removable disk or an SD Memory Card
with a volume label “K-5”.
If the “K-5” dialog appears when the camera is turned on, select [Open
folder to view files using Windows Explorer] and click the OK button.
4
5
Save the captured images to your computer.
Drag and drop the image file(s) or the folder containing the image files in
your camera to the hard disk of your computer or the desktop.
Disconnect your camera from your computer.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320
Using the Provided Software
“PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” is included on the CD-ROM (S-
SW110). Using the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4, you can manage
images saved on your computer, and develop RAW files taken with the
X and adjust the color of the images.
Compatible file formats:.bmp (BMP)/.jpg (JPEG)/.pef (files recorded in
PENTAX’s original RAW format)/.png (PNG)/.tif
(TIFF)/.dng (DNG format RAW file)
Installing the Software
You can install the software from the provided CD-ROM.
When multiple accounts have been setup on your computer, log on with
an account that has administrative rights before installing the software.
1
Turn your computer on.
Make sure no other software is running.
2
Place the CD-ROM (S-SW110) into the CD-ROM drive on
your computer.
The [PENTAX Software Installer] screen appears.
If the [PENTAX Software Installer] screen does not appear
• For Windows
10
1 Click [My Computer] from the Start menu.
2 Double-click the [CD-ROM drive (S-SW110)] icon.
3 Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.
• For Macintosh
1 Double-click the CD-ROM (S-SW110) icon on the desktop.
2 Double-click the [PENTAX Installer] icon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
321
3
Click [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4].
For Windows, proceed to Step 4.
For Macintosh, follow the instructions
on the screen to perform subsequent
steps.
4
5
Select the desired language in
the [Choose Setup Language]
screen and click [OK].
When the [InstallShield
Wizard] screen appears in the
selected language, click
[Next].
Follow the instructions on the screen
to perform subsequent steps.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322
Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
When PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4 is launched, the following screen
(browser) appears.
The screenshots used in this explanation are for Windows.
Browser tab set (default setting)
You can perform the file management functions such as viewing and
organizing the images.
1
2
3
4
3
10
5
1Menu Bar
This executes functions or makes various settings.
For Macintosh, the Menu bar appears at the top of the desktop.
2Tool Bar
Frequently used functions are provided as Tool bar buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
323
3Control Panel
Shooting information and settings of the selected image appear in this
panel. The set of tab pages displayed in Control Panel can be changed
by pressing the Browser, Laboratory and Custom buttons on the Tool
bar.
4File Display Pane
The file list and the images in the selected folder appear here.
5Status Bar
Information on the selected item appears.
Laboratory tab set (default setting)
The control panel for adjusting the image appears here.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324
Custom tab set (default setting)
The screen display can be customized here.
The Custom tab pages enable you to customize whether to show/hide
the various tab pages in accordance with your needs. By default, all tab
pages are displayed.
Viewing Detailed Information on the Software
Refer to Help for details on using the software program.
10
1
Click the
bar.
button on the Tool
Or, select [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility Help] from the [Help] menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
325
Regarding Product Registration
To better serve you, please take a moment to register your software.
Click [Product Registration] on the
A world map for Internet Product
Registration is displayed. If your
computer is connected to the
Internet, click the displayed country
or region and then follow the
instructions to register your software.
Note that you can only register online
if your country or area is shown.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328
Default Settings
The table below shows the factory default settings.
turned off.
Reset Setting
Yes: The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function
No : The setting is saved even after reset.
Direct Keys
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
9 (Single Frame
Drive Mode
Flash Mode
Yes
Shooting)
Depends on
the capture mode
Yes
White Balance
Custom Image
F (Auto)
Yes
Yes
Bright
[A Rec. Mode] Menu
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
USER Mode
A1
e (Hyper-program)
JPEG
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Exposure Mode
File Format
JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
p (4928×3264)
C(Best)
11 AF Points
Off
11
AUTO AF Point Setting
Distortion Correction
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj
Lens
Correction
Off
Cross Processing
Off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
329
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Off
Page
Type
Yes
Yes
Extended
Bracketing
BA±1 (White Balance)/
±1 (other than White
Balance)
Bracketing Amount
Digital Filter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Not use any filters
Off
HDR Capture
HDR
Capture
Auto Align
P (Off)
Number of Shots
Auto EV Adjustment
Interval
2 times
P (Off)
Multi-
exposure
1 sec.
Number of Shots
Start Interval
2 images
Now
Interval
Shooting
Start Time
12:00AM / 00:00
Center
X-Y direction
Composition
Adjust.
Rotation
±0°
Recall Previous Position
Highlight Correction
Shadow Correction
Sensitivity limit
AUTO ISO Parameters
P (Off)
Off
D-Range
Setting
Off
100 – 3200
s (Standard)
Auto
ISO AUTO
Setting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Program Line
Auto
k (Normal)
Color Space
sRGB
PEF
RAW File Format
b (1280×720,
16:9, 30 fps)
Recorded Pixels
Yes
11
Quality Level
C(Best)
g (On)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Sound
Movie
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
Off
Not use any filters
Fixed
Movie Aperture Control
Shake Reduction
l (Off)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
Autofocus Method
Show Grid
I (Face Detection AF)
Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Live
View
Info Overlay
O (On)
Histogram
P (Off)
Bright/Dark Area
P (Off)
Electronic Level
P (Off)
Horizon Correction
P (Off)
k (On)
Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length
35 mm
1 sec.
Display Time
Histogram
P (Off)
P (Off)
Instant
Review
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant
Review
O (On)
Yes
Histogram
P (Off)
Yes
Yes
Digital
Preview
Bright/Dark Area
P (Off)
Enlarge Instant
Review
O (On)
Yes
Yes
Rb, Sc,
e
|´e
K
b
R
–, So
,
|–
Rb, S–, |–
c
R
–, Sc
,
|
–
E-Dial
Programming
Rb, Sc,
L/a
|eLINE
p
R
–, Sc
R–, Sc, |
–, Sc
|cSHIFT
,
|
–
M
–
11
R
,
C
|/Y Button
= Button
One Push File Format
Enable AF
Button
Customization
Yes
Preview Dial
Optical Preview
Shutter Button Half
Press
Enable AF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
331
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
Cross Processing,
Digital Filter, HDR
Capture
P (Off)
Yes
Memory
Other than the above
functions
O (On)
Yes
–
Yes
Save USER Mode
*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to A.
*2 The saved settings are reset only with [Reset USER Mode] in the [Save USER Mode]
screen.
Playback Mode Palette
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
Image Rotation
Digital Filter
–
–
Toy Camera
Yes
Maximum size
according to the setting
Resize
–
–
Maximum size
according to the setting
Cropping
Slideshow
–
–
–
–
Save as Manual WB
File Format: JPEG
Recorded Pixels: p
Quality Level: C
RAW Development
Yes
Index
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Image Comparison
Movie Editing
Protect
–
No
No
DPOF
11
*3 The parameters specified in [Digital Filter] are also reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332
[Q Playback] Menu
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
Interval
3 sec.
Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Slideshow
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
P (Off)
Off
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
Delete All Images
P (Off)
O (On)
–
[R Set-up] Menu
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
According to default setting
According to default setting
W (Hometown)
Same as Hometown
Same as Hometown
According to default setting
According to default setting
According to default setting
3
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Language/u
Date Adjustment
Setting the Time
Destination (City)
World Time Destination (DST)
Hometown (City)
Hometown (DST)
Text Size
Volume
Beep
Yes
Setting
All O (On)
Guide Display
3 sec.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Status Screen
O (On)
Status
Screen
Auto Screen Rotation
O (On)
Display Color
Brightness Level
LCD Color Tuning
Video Out
1
11
±0
±0
According to default setting
Auto
HDMI Out
Yes
Yes
Yes
USB Connection
Folder Name
MSC
Date
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
333
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
Create New Folder
File Name
–
–
No
IMGP/_IGP
Embed Copyright
Data
P (Off)
Copyright
No
Information Photographer
Copyright Holder
–
–
Auto Power Off
1 min.
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Select Battery
Select
Auto Select
Battery
AA Battery Type
Auto-detect
Reset
–
–
–
Pixel Mapping
Dust Alert
–
–
Dust Removal
Start-up Action
–
–
Dust
Removal
O (On)
Yes
–
Sensor Cleaning
Format
–
–
–
*4 The setting can be reset only with [Reset File Name] in the [File Name] screen.
[A Custom Setting] Menu
Reset
Item
Default Setting
Page
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1. EV Steps
1/3 EV Steps
1 EV Step
Off
–
2. Sensitivity Steps
3. Expanded Sensitivity
4. Meter Operating Time
5. AE-L with AF Locked
6. Link AE to AF Point
10 sec.
Off
Off
11
7. Auto EV Compensation
8. Auto Bracketing Order
9. One-Push Bracketing
10. WB Adjustable Range
11. WB When Using Flash
12. AWB in Tungsten Light
13. Color Temperature Steps
Off
–
0 - +
Off
Auto Adjustment
Auto White Balance
Subtle Correction
Kelvin
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334
Reset
Setting
Item
Default Setting
Page
14. Superimpose AF Area
15. AF.S Setting
On
Focus-priority
Focus-priority
On
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
16. AF.C Setting
17. AF Assist Light
18. AF with Remote Control
19. Remote Control in Bulb
20. Release While Charging
21. Flash in Wireless Mode
22. LCD Panel Illumination
23. Saving Rotation Info
24. Save Menu Location
25. Catch-in Focus
Off
Mode1
Off
On
High
On
Reset Menu Location
Off
26. AF Fine Adjustment
27. Using Aperture Ring
Reset Custom Functions
Off
Prohibited
–
Yes
Yes
–
screen.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
335
Resetting the Menus
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up
Menus
Settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu, [Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up]
menu, direct keys and playback mode palette can be reset to default
settings.
Language/u, Date Adjustment, the city and DST settings for World Time,
Text Size, Video Output, Copyright Information and [A Custom Setting] menu
settings are not reset.
[Reset] cannot be selected when the mode dial is set to A.
1
Select [Reset] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press the four-
way controller (5).
The [Reset] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
Reset
Returns to default settings
The settings are reset, and the screen
that was displayed before selecting the
menu appears again.
Reset
Cancel
OK
OK
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336
Resetting the Custom Menu
Reset settings in [A Custom Setting] menu to default values.
1
Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [A Custom
Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.
2
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
Reset Custom Functions
Returns the custom function
settings to default values
The settings are reset, and the screen
that was displayed before selecting the
menu appears again.
Reset
Cancel
OK
OK
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
337
Functions Available with Various
Lens Combinations
Only DA, DA L and FA J lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses which have an
s
(Auto) position on the aperture ring can be used with factory default settings.
D FA/FA/F/A lenses with aperture ring set to a position other than
s.
z: Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the
# : Some functions are restricted.
s
position.
× : Functions are unavailable.
DA
DA L
D FA
FA J
FA *6
F *6
A
M
P
Lens
[Mount type]
[KAF]
[KAF]
[KAF]
[KA]
[K]
[KAF2]
[KAF3]
[KAF2]
Function
Autofocus
(Lens only)
(With AF adapter 1.7×)
z
–
z
–
z
–
–
#
–
#
Manual focus
(With the focus indicator)
(With matte field)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Quick-Shift Focus System
#
×
×
×
×
×
×
Eleven AF points/Five AF points
Multi-segment metering
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
–
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z*7
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
–
#
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
–
e (Hyper-program) mode
#
K (Sensitivity Priority) mode
b (Shutter Priority) mode
c (Aperture Priority) mode
L (Shutter & Aperture Priority) mode
a (Hyper-manual) mode
#
#
#
#
11
#
×
–
P-TTL Auto Flash
Power Zoom
Automatically obtaining the lens focal
length information when using the
Shake Reduction function
z
z
z
z
×
×
×
×
Lens Correction function
×
×
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338
*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F2.8 or faster. Only available at the s position.
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F5.6 or faster.
*3 When using the built-in flash and AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.
*4 Aberration correction is available in [Lens Correction] of the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu. The
[Distortion Correction] setting is disabled when using the DA 10-17mm FISH-EYE lens.
*5 Only available with compatible lenses.
with the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.
*7 Only available with KAF2 mount FA lenses.
*8 Only available with compatible lenses (FA 31mm F1.8 Limited, FA 43mm F1.9 Limited,
or FA 77mm F1.8 Limited).
*9 The focusing area is fixed to U (Center).
*10 c (Aperture Priority) Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (Adjusting the
aperture ring has no effect on the actual aperture value.)
Lens Names and Mount Names
DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom
use the KAF2 mount. DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler
use the KAF3 mount.
FA single focal length lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA or DA L lenses
without an ultrasonic motor and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF
mount.
Refer to respective lens manuals for details.
Lenses and Accessories that Cannot be Used with this Camera
When the aperture ring is set to other than the s (Auto) position or a lens
without an s position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or
auto bellows are used, the camera will not operate unless [27. Using
apply.
All camera exposure modes are available when using DA/DA L/FA J or
lenses with an s position set to the s position.
11
Lens and Built-in Flash
The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses
not set to the s (Auto) position, pre A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.
Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
339
Notes on [27. Using Aperture Ring]
27. Using Aperture Ring
[Permitted] in the [
the shutter can be released even if the
A
Custom Setting 4] menu,
1
2
Prohibited
Permitted
aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or A lens is not
set to the
an position is attached. However, some
features will be restricted as shown below.
s
(Auto) position or a lens without
Shutter will release when
aperture ring is not set to the
"A" position
s
OK
MENU
Cancel
OK
Restrictions on using lenses with aperture ring set to a position other
than s
Exposure
Mode
Lens Used
Restriction
The aperture remains open regardless
of the aperture ring position. The
shutter speed changes in relation to
the open aperture but an exposure
error may occur. In the viewfinder,
[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens
only or with auto
diaphragm accessories
such as auto extension
tube K)
c (Aperture
Priority)
D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (with
diaphragm accessories
such as extension tube K)
Pictures can be taken with a
specified aperture value but an
exposure error may occur. In the
viewfinder, [F--] appears for the
aperture indicator.
c (Aperture
Priority)
Manualdiaphragmlens such c (Aperture
as reflex lens (lens only)
Priority)
Pictures can be taken with a specified
aperture value in the manual aperture
range. In the viewfinder,
[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
When the depth of field is checked
(Optical Preview), exposure metering
starts and the exposure can be checked.
FA, F SOFT 85mm, FA
SOFT 28mm (lens only) Priority)
c (Aperture
Pictures can be taken with a set aperture
value and shutter speed. In the viewfinder,
[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.
When the depth of field is checked
(Optical Preview), exposure metering
starts and the exposure can be checked.
11
a (Hyper-
All lenses
manual)
The camera operates in c (Aperture Priority) mode even if the mode dial is at
B, e, K, b or L when the aperture is set to other than the s position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor
If the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty, shadows may appear in the
image in certain situations such as when shooting against a white
background. This indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.
Removing Dust with Ultrasonic Vibrations
(Dust Removal)
Dust adhering to the CMOS sensor is removed by applying ultrasonic
vibrations to the filter on the front surface of the CMOS sensor for
approximately one second.
1
Select [Dust Removal] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.
2
Press the 4 button.
Dust Removal
Dust Removal
Start-up Action
The Dust Removal function is activated.
Set [Start-up Action] to O (On) to turn the
Dust Removal function on every time the
camera is turned on.
When Dust Removal is completed, the
camera returns to the [R Set-up 4] menu.
OK
MENU
Start
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
341
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor
(Dust Alert)
Dust Alert is a function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor and
visually displays the location of the dust.
You can save an image indicating the dust location and display it when
The following conditions must be met before using the Dust Alert function:
- A DA, DA L, FA J lens or a D FA, FA or F lens that has an s (Auto)
position is attached.
- The aperture is set to the s position when using a lens with an
aperture ring.
- The mode dial is set to any mode other than C (Movie).
- The focus mode lever is set to l or A.
• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert
function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing is
complete, dust will not be detected properly.
• Depending on the subject conditions or temperature, dust may not be
detected properly.
• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30
minutes from the time the image is saved. If more than 30 minutes elapse,
save a new Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.
• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.
• The Dust Alert image is saved only when an SD Memory Card is inserted.
1
Select [Dust Alert] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press the
four-way controller (5).
The [Dust Alert] screen appears.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342
2
3
Fully display a white wall or other
bright subject with no detail in
the viewfinder and press the
shutter release button fully.
Dust Alert
Checks for dust on the sensor.
Press shutter release button
to reveal dust location
After image processing is performed, the
Dust Alert image appears.
MENU
SHUTTER
Check
If the message [The operation could not
be completed correctly] is displayed,
press the 4 button and take another picture.
Check the sensor for dust.
OK
x1
Exit
Available operations
Rear e-dial (S)/
M button
Displays the Dust Alert image at full screen
display.
4
Press the 4 button.
The Dust Alert image is saved and the camera returns to the [R Set-up
4] menu.
Regardless of the camera settings, the Dust Alert image will be taken with
specific shooting conditions.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
343
Removing Dust with a Blower
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter when cleaning the CMOS sensor
with a blower.
Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning
because the CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve
a fee.
cleaning the CMOS sensor.
• Do not use a spray type blower.
• Do not perform Sensor Cleaning during Bulb shooting. The shutter may
accidentally close and may cause damage to the camera’s internal parts.
• To prevent dirt and dust from accumulating on the CMOS sensor, keep the
lens mount cap on the camera when a lens is not attached.
• When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power
remaining to clean sensor] is displayed on the monitor.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when cleaning
the sensor. If you are not using the AC adapter kit K-AC50, please install the
battery with ample capacity remaining. If the battery capacity becomes low
during cleaning, a warning beep will sound. In this case, stop cleaning
immediately.
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is
turned off, this may cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor and the
mirror.
• The self-timer lamp blinks, and [d] and [Cln] appear on the LCD panel
while cleaning the sensor.
• This camera may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS
sensor. It is not a malfunction.
1
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
Turn the camera on.
2
3
11
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and
press the four-way controller (5).
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344
4
5
Press the four-way controller (2)
to select [Mirror Up] and press
the 4 button.
Sensor Cleaning
Raises mirror and opens shutter
for access to clean sensor.
Turn the power off to finish
The mirror is locked in the up position.
Mirror Up
Cancel
If you used Dust Alert to detect dust on
the sensor within the last 30 minutes, the
Dust Alert image appears on the monitor.
Clean the sensor while checking the
location of the dust.
OK
OK
Clean the CMOS sensor.
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt
and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a
blower with a brush may scratch the
CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS
sensor with a cloth.
6
7
Turn off the camera.
Attach the lens after the mirror returns to its original
position.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
345
Optional Accessories
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera. Contact
a PENTAX Service Center for details regarding accessories.
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied with
the camera.
Power Supply Accessories
Battery Charger kit K-BC90 (*)
(Kit includes Battery Charger D-BC90 and AC plug cord.)
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90 (*)
AC Adapter kit K-AC50
(Kit includes AC Adapter D-AC50 and AC plug cord.)
Lets you power your camera from an AC outlet.
Battery Grip D-BG4
The Battery Grip has features such as a
shutter release button, front e-dial, rear
e-dial, and L button to
accommodate shooting vertically. In
addition to the rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI90, AA lithium/Ni-MH/
alkaline batteries can also be used in
the battery grip to power the camera.
The battery charger and AC adapter are only sold as a kit respectively.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346
Flash Accessories
Auto Flash AF540FGZ
Auto Flash AF360FGZ
The AF540FGZ and AF360FGZ are P-
TTL auto flash units with a maximum
guide number of 54 and 36 (ISO 100/m),
respectively. Their features include
slave-sync flash, contrast-control-sync
flash, high-speed sync flash, wireless
flash, slow-speed sync and trailing
curtain sync flash.
AF540FGZ
AF360FGZ
Auto Flash AF200FG
The AF200FG is a P-TTL auto flash unit
with a maximum guide number of 20
(ISO 100/m). It features contrast-
control-sync flash and slow-speed sync
flash when combined with an
AF200FG
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit.
Auto Macro Flash AF160FC
The AF160FC is a flash system
especially designed for macro
photography to take close, shadowless
pictures of small objects. It is compatible
with existing TTL auto flash functions
and it can be used with a wide range of
PENTAX cameras by using provided
adapter rings.
11
AF160FC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
347
Hot Shoe Adapter FG
Extension Cord F5P
Hot Shoe Adapter FG
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F
Use the adapters and cords to use the
external flash away from the camera.
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
When using the AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ as a wireless flash, this
large clip is used for setting the external
flash on a desk or table.
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
For Viewfinder
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53
This viewfinder accessory is for magnifying
up to approximately 1.18 times.
When the eyecup is attached to the
with a viewfinder magnification of
X
approximately 0.92 times, the combined
magnification becomes approximately 1.09
times, making manual focusing much easier.
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53
11
Magnifier FB
This viewfinder accessory is for
magnifying the central area of the
viewfinder 2×.
You can see the entire view by simply
flipping up the accessory from the eye-
piece, as it is a hinge-type magnifier.
Magnifier FB
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348
Ref-converter A
This is an accessory that changes the
viewfinder viewing angle at 90°
intervals. The viewfinder magnification
can be switched between 1× and 2×.
Ref-converter A
Diopter correction lens adapter M
This accessory adjusts the diopter.
Install it on the viewfinder.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder
image clearly, choose one of the eight
correction of approximately -5 to +3m-1
(per meter).
Diopter correction lens adapter M
ME Viewfinder Cap (*)
Eyecup FR (*)
Interchangeable Focusing Screen
AF Frame Matte MF-60 (*)
AF Divided Matte ML-60
M60
M60
AF Scale Matte MI-60
Plain Matte ME-60
11
M60
M60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
349
Cable Switch CS-205
Connect to the cable release terminal
and operate the camera shutter release
button. The cord length is 0.5 m.
Remote Control
Used for Remote Control shooting.
Operating distance for remote control
From the front of camera: approx. 4 m
From the back of camera: approx. 2 m
Remote Control F
Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1
Camera Case/Strap
Camera Case O-CC90
11
Camera Strap O-ST53 (*)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350
Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1
Use this kit to clean the optical parts
such as the CMOS sensor and lens of
this camera.
Others
Body Mount Cap K
Hot Shoe Cover FK (*)
USB Cable I-USB7 (*)
AV Cable I-AVC7 (*)
Sync Socket 2P Cap (*)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
351
Error Messages
Error message
Description
The SD Memory Card is full and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Data may be saved when you perform the
following operations.
Memory card full
• Change the JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG
There are no images that can be played back
on the SD Memory Card.
No image
You are trying to play back an image in a format
not supported by this camera. You may be able
to play it back on another brand of camera or
your computer.
This image cannot be displayed
The SD Memory Card is not inserted in the
camera. (p.55)
No card in the camera
Cannot use this card
The inserted SD Memory Card is not
compatible with this camera.
The SD Memory Card has a problem, and
image capture and playback are impossible. It
may be viewable on a computer but not with this
camera.
Memory card error
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is
unformatted or has been formatted on another
device and is not compatible with this camera.
Use the card after formatting it with this camera.
Card is not formatted
Card is locked
The write-protect switch on an SD Memory
Card you have inserted is locked. Unlock the
11
The card is
electronically locked
Data is protected by an SD Memory Card
security feature.
This image cannot be
enlarged
You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot
be enlarged.
You are trying to delete an image that is
protected. Remove protection from the image.
This image is protected
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352
Error message
Description
The battery is exhausted. Install a fully charged
Battery depleted
Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged
battery or use an AC adaptor kit K-AC50
(optional). (p.53)
Not enough battery
power remaining to
clean sensor
Appears during pixel mapping if the battery
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged
battery or use an AC adaptor kit K-AC50
(optional). (p.53)
Not enough battery
power remaining to
activate Pixel Mapping
The maximum folder number (999) and file
number (9999) are being used, and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or format the card. (p.281)
Image folder cannot be created
The image could not be saved because of an
SD Memory Card error.
Unable to store image
Settings not stored
The DPOF settings could not be saved because
SD Memory Card is full. Delete unwanted
images and perform DPOF setting again. (p.84)
The camera was unable to measure the manual
white balance or detect dust on the sensor. Try
The operation could not be
completed correctly
No more images can be
selected
You cannot select 100 or more images at a time
There are no images that can be processed
Appears when you try to perform Save as
This image cannot be
processed
other cameras, or when you try to perform
Resize or Cropping for minimum file size
images.
11
The camera failed to create
an image
The creation of an index print image failed.
Live View cannot be used because the
camera’s internal temperature is too high.
Press the 4 button and try using Live View
again when the camera has cooled down.
Camera overheated.
Disabling Live View temporarily
to protect circuitry
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
353
Error message
Description
Appears if Live View is started when [27. Using
Custom Setting 4] menu and the lens aperture
ring is set to a position other than s, or a lens
without an s position is being used.
Cannot start Live View
This function is not available You are trying to set a function that is not
in the current mode available in B (Green) or C (Movie) mode.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354
Troubleshooting
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static
electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting it
back in again. When the mirror remains in the up position, take the battery
out and put it back in again. Then, the mirror will retract when the camera
is turned on again. After these procedures are done, if the camera
operates correctly, it does not require any repairs.
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service
center.
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The battery is not Check if a battery is installed. If not, install a
The camera
does not turn
on
installed fully charged battery.
The battery power Replace with a fully charged battery or use
is low
the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional). (p.53)
Set the lens aperture ring to the s position
The lens aperture
ring is set to other
than the s position
The shutter
cannot be
released
The built-in flash is
charging
Wait until charging is finished.
Thereisnoavailable Insert an SD Memory Card with available
space on the SD
Memory Card
p.84)
Recording
Wait until recording is finished.
Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects
that have low contrast (the sky, white walls,
etc.), dark colors, intricate designs, rapidly-
moving objects or scenery shot through a
window or a net-like pattern. Lock focus on
another object located at the same distance
as your subject, then aim at the target and
press the shutter release button fully.
The subject is
difficult to focus on
11
Autofocus
does not work
Position the subject in the focus frame in the
The subject is not middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is outside
in the focusing
area
the focusing area, aim the camera at the subject
and lock the focus, then compose a picture and
The subject is too Move away from the subject and take a
close picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
355
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Autofocus
The focus mode is Set the focus mode lever to l or A.
does not work set to \
Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when
the focus mode is set to k (A). The
camera will continue focusing on the subject
while the shutter release button is pressed
halfway. If there is a subject that you wish to
focus on, slide the focus mode lever to l
The focus
cannot be
locked
The focus mode is
set to k
The AE Lock
Set the exposure mode to any mode other
The exposure
function does mode is set to B, than B (Green), p (Bulb) or M (Flash X-
not operate
p or M mode
sync Speed).
Only C (Auto Flash Discharge) and D
(Auto Flash+Red-eye Reduction) are
available for the flash mode when the
exposure mode is B (Green). The flash will
The built-in
The exposure
flash does not mode is set to B not discharge when the subject is bright in
discharge
mode
these modes. In the exposure modes other
than B, only the flash mode that
discharges every time the flash recharges is
available. Try different exposure modes.
The USB
connectionwith The USB
Set [USB Connection] to [MSC] in the [R
Set-up 2] menu. (p.317)
a computer
connectionmodeis
does not work set to [PTP]
properly
The Shake
Reduction function
is off
Set [Shake Reduction] to k (On) in the
If a lens for which the focal length
information cannot be obtained is used, set
the focal length in the [Input Focal Length]
The Shake
Reduction function
is not set properly
Shake
Reduction
does not work
Shutter speedis too
low for the Shake
Reduction function Turn off the Shake Reduction function and
to be effective when use a tripod.
panningor shooting
11
night scenes, etc.
The subject is too Move away from the subject, or turn off the
close
Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356
Main Specifications
Model Description
TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera with
built-in retractable P-TTL flash
Type
PENTAX KAF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information
contacts, K-mount with power contacts)
Lens Mount
Compatible Lens
KAF3, KAF2 (power zoom compatible), KAF, KA mount lenses
Image Capture Unit
Image Sensor
Effective Pixels
Total Pixels
Primary color filter, CMOS, Size: 23.7 x 15.7 (mm)
Approx. 16.28 megapixels
Approx. 16.93 megapixels
Image sensor cleaning using ultrasonic vibrations “DR II” with
the Dust Alert function
Dust Removal
AUTO/100 to 12800 (EV steps can be set to 1 EV, 1/2 EV or 1/
3 EV), expandable from ISO 80 to ISO 51200. Up to ISO 1600
in p mode.
Sensitivity (Standard
Output)
Image Stabilizer
Type
CMOS image sensor shift
Effective
Compensation
Range
Up to 4 EV (depending on the used lens type and shooting
conditions)
File Formats
File Format
RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.21), DCF2.0 compliant
JPEG: p (4928×3264 pixels), J (3936×2624 pixels), P
(3072×2048 pixels), i (1728×1152 pixels)
RAW: p (4928×3264 pixels)
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
RAW (14bit): PEF, DNG JPEG: Z (Premium), C
(Best), D (Better), E (Good), RAW + JPEG simultaneous
capturing compatible
11
Color Space
sRGB, AdobeRGB
Storage Medium
SD/SDHC Memory Card
Date (100_1018,101_1019...)/
PENTX (100PENTX, 101PENTX...)
Storage Folder
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
357
Viewfinder
Type
Pentaprism Finder
Coverage (FOV)
Magnification
Approx. 100%
Approx. 0.92× (50 mm F1.4 • ∞)
Approx. 21.7 mm (from the view window), Approx. 24.5 mm
(from the center of lens)
Eye-Relief Length
-1
Diopter Adjustment
Focusing Screen
Approx. -2.5 to +1.5m
Interchangeable Natural-Bright-Matte III focusing screen
Live View
Type
TTL method using CMOS image sensor
Contrast detection + Face detection, Contrast detection, Phase
matching
Focusing Mechanism
Display
Field of View approx. 100%, Magnified view (= mode: 2×, 4×,
6×/\ mode: 2×, 4×, 6×, 8×, 10×), Grid display (4×4 Grid,
Golden Section, Scale display), Bright/dark area warning,
Histogram
LCD Monitor
Type
Wide viewing angle TFT color LCD
3.0 inches
Size
Dots
Approx. 921,000 dots
Adjustment
Brightness and colors adjustable
Preview
Type
Optical preview, digital preview
White Balance
Auto
TTL method using CMOS image sensor
Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight Color,
N: Daylight White, W: Cool White, L: Warm White), Tungsten
Light, Flash, f, Manual, Color Temperature
Preset
Configuration using the display screen (up to 3 settings can be
saved), Color Temperature settings (up to 3 settings can be
saved), Copying the white balance setting of a captured image
11
Manual
Fine Adjustment
Adjustable ±7 steps on A-B axis and/or G-M axis
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
358
Autofocus System
Type
TTL: phase-matching autofocus
Focus Sensor
Brightness Range
SAFOX IX+, 11 points (9 cross type focus points in the center)
EV-1 to 18 (ISO100)
Single AF (l), Continuous AF (k)
Focus priority or shutter priority mode for l
Focus priority or FPS priority mode for k
AF Mode
AF Point Selection
AF Assist Light
Auto: 5 points, Auto: 11 points, Select, Center
Dedicated LED AF assist light
Metering
TTL open aperture, 77 segmented metering, center-weighted
and spot metering
Type
Exposure
Compensation
EV0 to 22 (ISO100 50mm F1.4)
Green, Program, Sensitivity Priority, Shutter Priority, Aperture
Priority, Shutter & Aperture Priority, Manual, Bulb, Flash X-sync
Speed
Exposure Mode
EV Compensation
Steps
±5 EV (1/2 EV steps or 1/3 EV steps can be selected)
Available via dedicated AE Lock button (timer type: two times
the meter operating time set in Custom Setting); Continuous as
long as the shutter button is halfway pressed.
AE Lock
Shutter
Type
Electronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter
Auto: 1/8000 to 30 sec., Manual: 1/8000 to 30 sec. (1/3 EV
steps or 1/ 2EV steps), Bulb
Shutter Speed
Drive Modes
Single frame, Continuous (Hi, Lo), Self-timer (12s, 2s), Remote
Control (immediately, 3 sec., continuous), Auto Bracketing (2, 3 or
5 frames), Auto Bracketing + Self-timer, Auto Bracketing +
Remote Control, Mirror Lock-up, Mirror Lock-up + Remote Control
Mode Selection
11
Max. approx. 7.0 fps, JPEG (p•C•Continuous Hi): up to
approx. 30 frames, RAW: up to approx. 8 frames
Max. approx. 1.6 fps, JPEG (p•C•Continuous Lo): until
SD Memory Card is full, RAW: up to approx. 10 frames
Continuous Shooting
Flash
Built-in P-TTL flash with serial control, GN: approx. 13 (ISO100/m)
Angle of view: equivalent to angle of view of 28mm lens (35mm
format equivalent)
Built-in Flash
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
359
P-TTL, Red-eye Reduction, Slow-speed Sync, Trailing Curtain
Sync, High-Speed Sync and Wireless Sync are also available
with PENTAX dedicated external flash.
Flash Mode
Sync Speed
1/180 sec.
Flash Exposure
Compensation
-2.0 to +1.0EV
Capture Functions
Custom Image
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome
Noise Reduction
Slow Shutter Speed NR, High-ISO NR
Dynamic Range
Setting
Highlight Correction, Shadow Correction
Lens Correction
Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction
Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3
Cross Processing
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Soft,
Starburst, Fish-eye, Custom Filter
Digital Filter
Auto, Standard, Strong 1, Strong 2, Strong 3, Automatic
composition correction function
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
Select the number of shots between 2 and 9. Auto EV
adjustment available.
Capture Interval setting (1 sec. to 24 hr.), Start Interval setting
(immediate, designated time), Captures up to 999 images
White Balance, Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adj, Contrast,
Sharpness
Extended Bracketing
Horizon Correction
SR On: adjusts up to 1 degree, SR Off: adjusts up to 2 degrees
Composition
Adjustment
Adjustment range of ±1.5 mm up, down, left or right (1 mm
when rotated); rotating range of 1 degree
Displayed in viewfinder (horizontal direction only); displayed on
LCD monitor (horizontal direction and vertical direction)
Electronic Level
Movie
File Format
Motion JPEG (AVI)
a (1920×1080, 16:9, 25 fps), b (1280×720, 16:9, 30 fps/
25 fps), c (640×480, 4:3, 30 fps/25 fps)
Recorded Pixels
11
Quality Level
Sound
C (Best), D (Better), E (Good)
Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo microphone terminal
Up to 25 minutes; automatically stops recording if the internal
temperature of the camera becomes high.
Recording Time
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, Bleach
Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome
Custom Image
Cross Processing
Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
360
Digital Filter
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Color
Playback Functions
Single frame, image comparison, multi-image display (4, 9, 16,
36, 81 segmentation), display magnification (up to 32x,
scrolling and quick magnification available), rotating, histogram
(Y histogram, RGB histogram), bright/dark area warning,
detailed information display, copyright information display
(photographer, copyright holder), folder display, calendar
display, slideshow
Playback View
Delete single image, delete all, select & delete, delete folder,
delete instant review image
Delete
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Sketch Filter, Water Color,
Pastel, Posterization, Miniature, Base Parameter Adjustment,
Monochrome, Color, Extract Color, Soft, Starburst, Fish-eye,
Slim, HDR, Custom Filter
Digital Filter
File Format (JPEG, TIFF), Custom Image, White Balance,
Sensitivity, High-ISO NR, Shadow Correction, Distortion
Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction, Color
Space
RAW Development
Edit
Resize, Cropping (Aspect ratio and Slant adjustment
available), Index, Movie Edit (Divide or delete selected frames),
Capturing a JPEG still picture from a movie
Customization
User Mode
Up to 5 settings can be saved.
Custom Functions
Mode Memory
27 items
13 items
|/Y button (One Push File Format, Exposure Bracketing,
Digital Preview, Electronic Level, Composition Adjustment)
= button (Enable AF, Cancel AF)
Custom Button
Electrical dial customizable specifically to each exposure mode.
Text Size
Standard, Large
World Time
World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)
English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch,
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish,
Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, and Japanese
11 Language
±10 steps, uniform adjustment, individual adjustment (up to 20
can be saved)
AF Fine Adjustment
Names of “Photographer” and “Copyright Holder” are
Copyright Information embedded to the image file.
Revision history can be checked using the provided software.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
361
Power Supply
Battery Type
AC Adapter
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90
AC Adapter kit K-AC50 (optional)
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.
740 images,
(without flash usage): approx. 980 images
Playback time: approx. 440 minutes
Battery Life
* Tested in compliance with CIPA standard. Actual results may
vary depending on the shooting conditions/circumstances.
Interfaces
USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible)/AV output, DC input, Cable
switch, X-sync socket, HDMI output, Stereo microphone
Connection Port
USB Connection
MSC/PTP
Video Output Format NTSC/PAL
Dimensions and
Weight
Approx. 131 mm (W) × 97 mm (H) × 73 mm (D) (excluding
protrusions)
Dimensions
Weight
Approx. 660 g (body only), Approx. 740 g (including dedicated
battery and SD Memory Card)
Accessories
Package Contents
Software
USB Cable I-USB7, AV Cable I-AVC7, Strap O-ST53, ME
Viewfinder Cap, Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90,
Battery Charger D-BC90, AC plug cord, Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW110
<Mounted on the camera> Eyecup FR, Hot shoe cover FK, Body
mount cover, Sync socket 2P cap
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
362
Glossary
AdobeRGB
Color space recommended by Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial printing. Wider
range of color reproduction than sRGB. Covers most of the color range so colors
only available when printed are not lost when editing images on a computer. When
an image is opened by non-compatible software, the colors look lighter.
Auto Bracketing
For automatically changing exposure. When the shutter release button is
pressed, several images are captured. One has no compensation, one or
more are underexposed, and one or more are overexposed. This camera
features Exposure Bracketing that captures images in different exposures,
and Extended Bracketing that captures images with set White Balance,
Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adjustment, Contrast and Sharpness
levels.
AE Metering
Brightness of subject is measured to determine exposure. In this camera, select
from [Multi-segment Metering], [Center-weighted Metering] and [Spot Metering].
AF point
Position in the viewfinder that determines focus. In this camera, select
from [Auto], [Select] and [Center].
Aperture
The aperture increases or reduces the light beam (thickness) passing
through the lens to the CMOS sensor.
Bright Portion
Overexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears white.
Camera Shake (Blur)
11
When the camera moves while the shutter is open, the entire image
appears blurred. This occurs more often when shutter speed is low.
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, and
raising the shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod to stabilize the
camera. As camera shake is most likely to occur when pressing the shutter
release button, use the Shake Reduction function, Self-timer or Remote
Control shooting to prevent camera movement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
363
CMOS sensor
Photography element which converts light entering through the lens into
electric signals that create an image.
Color Space
A defined range of colors from the spectrum which are used. In digital
cameras, [sRGB] is defined as the standard by Exif. In this camera,
[AdobeRGB], which supports a wider color gamut than sRGB, can be also
used.
Color Temperature
This numerically expresses the color of the light source illuminating the
subject. This is indicated in absolute temperature, using Kelvin (K) units.
The color of light shifts to a bluish color as the color temperature rises, and
to a reddish color as the color temperature falls.
Dark Portion
Underexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears black.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A digital camera file system standard established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Depth of field
Area of focus. This depends on the aperture value, lens focal length, and
distance to the subject. For example, select a smaller aperture value
(higher number) to increase the depth of field or use a larger aperture
value (smaller number) to decrease the depth of field.
DNG RAW file
DNG (Digital Negative) is a general-purpose RAW file format designed by
Adobe Systems. When images captured in proprietary RAW formats are
converted to DNG format, support and compatibility for the images
increases significantly.
11
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
Rules for writing information onto a card with recorded images regarding
the specific images and number of copies to be printed. Prints can easily
be made by taking the images to a DPOF photo printing store.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
364
Dynamic Range (D-Range)
Indicated with a value expressing the light level reproducible in an image.
This is the same as the term “Exposure latitude” used with silver halide
film.
Generally, when the dynamic range is wide, overexposed and/or
underexposed areas are less likely to occur within the image, and when
the dynamic range is narrow, all image tones can be reproduced sharply
and accurately.
EV (Exposure Value)
Exposure value is determined by a combination of the aperture value and
the shutter speed.
EV Compensation
Process of adjusting the image brightness by changing the shutter speed
and/or aperture value.
Exif (Exchangeable image file format for digital still camera)
A standard digital camera file format established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Exif-JPEG format
Exif stands for Exchangeable Image File Format. This image file format is
based on the JPEG image data format, and allows thumbnail images and
image properties to be embedded into the data. Software that does not
support this format processes the image as a regular JPEG image.
Exif-TIFF format
Exif stands for Exchangeable Image File Format. This image file format is
based on the TIFF image data format, and allows thumbnail images and
image properties to be embedded into the data. Software that does not
support this format processes the image as a regular TIFF image.
Histogram
11
A graph that shows the darkest and brightest points in an image. The
horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents
the number of pixels. This is useful when you check the exposure level of
an image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
365
ISO Sensitivity
The level of sensitivity to light. With a high sensitivity, images can be shot
with a high shutter speed even in dark places, reducing camera shake.
However, images taken with a high sensitivity are more susceptible to
noise.
JPEG
An image compression format. Although the image quality deteriorates a
little, images can be compressed to a smaller file size than with TIFF and
other formats. In this camera, select from Z (Premium), C (Best),
D (Better), or E (Good). Images recorded in JPEG format are suited for
viewing on your computer or attaching to e-mail.
Mired
Proportional scale of measurement that consistently shows color change
per unit. Determined by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by
1,000,000.
ND (Neutral Density) Filter
A filter with many saturation levels that adjusts the brightness without
affecting the color tone of pictures.
Noise Reduction
Process to reduce noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by
slow shutter speed or high sensitivity shooting.
NTSC/PAL
These are video output formats. NTSC is mainly used in Japan, North
America, and South Korea. PAL is mainly used in Europe and China.
Quality Level
This refers to the image compression ratio. The lower the compression,
the more detailed the image. The image becomes rougher as the
compression rate rises.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366
RAW data
Unedited image data output from the CMOS sensor. RAW data is data
before being internally processed by the camera. Camera settings at the
time of capture, such as White Balance, Contrast, Saturation, and
Sharpness can be set for each frame after shooting. In addition, RAW data
is 14 bit data that contain 64 times the information of 8 bit JPEG data. Rich
gradations are possible. Transfer RAW data to your computer and use the
provided software to create image data with different settings, such as
JPEG or TIFF.
Recorded Pixels
Indicates the size of the image by the number of pixels. The more pixels
that compose a picture, the larger the image size.
Shutter Speed
The length of time that the shutter is open and light strikes the CMOS
sensor. The amount of light that strikes the CMOS sensor can be changed
by altering the shutter speed.
sRGB (standard RGB)
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for
computer monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.
Vignetting
The picture edges are blackened when part of the light coming from the
subject is blocked by the hood or filter ring, or when the flash is partially
blocked by the lens.
White Balance
While shooting, color temperature is adjusted to match the light source so
that the subject appears to have the correct color.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368
Contrast-Control-Sync mode
(flash) ...................................196
E
Customizing buttons and dials
.............................................282
D
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
369
H
F
Filter Effect (Custom Image)
High/Low Key Adjustment
.............................................222
(Custom Image) ................... 222
High-Speed Flash Sync mode
(flash) ...................................189
Flash Exposure Compensation
...............................................82
Flash X-sync Speed ModeM
.............................................116
Fluorescent Light (White
Balance) ...............................205
I
11
G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370
Monochrome (Digital Filter)
J
K
L
Lateral chromatic aberration
.............................................218
............................................. 265
N
M
O
P
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
............................................. 320
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
371
Playing back images
continuously .........................246
Posterization (Digital Filter)
.............................................265
S
Saturation (Custom Image)
............................................. 222
Sensitivity Priority Mode K
............................................. 105
Sharpness (Custom Image)
............................................. 222
Shutter & Aperture Priority Mode
L ...................................... 110
Q
R
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
372
X
Z
T
Tungsten Light (White Balance)
.............................................205
U
V
W
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
373
WARRANTY POLICY
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of
material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of
purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not
show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,
battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,
or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for
damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or
workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of
the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-
authorized PENTAX service facilities.
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the
equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not
covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to
have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that
country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when
required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your
equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,
please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
374
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the
service station to proceed with the servicing.
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory
rights.
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in
some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your
product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the
warranty policy.
11
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European
Union.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
375
For customers in USA
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
11
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,
which may require special handling.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Declaration of Conformity
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals
We:
PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
th
Located at:
600 12 Street, Suite 300
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein
complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be
within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the
statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with
the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.
Product Name: PENTAX Digital Still Camera
Model Number: X
Contact person: Customer Service Manager
Date and Place: October, 2010, Colorado
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old
Equipment and Used Batteries
1. In the European Union
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or
accompanying documents mean that used electrical and
electronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed with
general household waste.
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must be
treated separately and in accordance with legislation that
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these
products.
Following the implementation by member states, private
households within the EU states may return their used
electrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designated
collection facilities free of charge*.
In some countries your local retailer may also take back your
old product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.
*Please contact your local authority for further details.
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure that
the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and
recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the
environment and human health which could otherwise arise
due to inappropriate waste handling.
2. In other countries outside the EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you
wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be
returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don't
purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed
on the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a designation
for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you
have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemicals involved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOYA CORPORATION
PENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN
(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX Europe Imaging 112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
Systems S.A.S.
FRANCE
(European Headquarters) (HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)
(France - http://www.pentax.fr)
PENTAX Imaging Systems Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,
GmbH
GERMANY
(http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX Imaging Systems PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks
Limited
SL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)
PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401,
U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
250 North 54th Street Chandler, Arizona 85226, U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
PENTAX Canada Inc.
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA
(http://www.pentax.ca)
PENTAX Trading
(SHANGHAI) Limited
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,
Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)
http://www.pentax.jp/english
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
58192
Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2010
H01-201009 Printed in Philippines
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|